NextERP/documentation
5
0
Fork 0
Code Issues Pull Requests Actions Packages Projects Releases Wiki Activity
8b49c23499
documentation/locale/sources/inventory_and_mrp.pot
Martin Trigaux 62a362f30a [I18N] *: export source terms 
closes 

X-original-commit: d53ba8c7e2
Signed-off-by: Martin Trigaux (mat) <mat@odoo.com>
2023-04-13 17:57:26 +02:00

7122 lines
446 KiB
Plaintext
Raw Blame History

This file contains ambiguous Unicode characters

This file contains Unicode characters that might be confused with other characters. If you think that this is intentional, you can safely ignore this warning. Use the Escape button to reveal them.

# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE.
# Copyright (C) Odoo S.A.
# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package.
# FIRST AUTHOR <EMAIL@ADDRESS>, YEAR.
#
#, fuzzy
msgid ""
msgstr ""
"Project-Id-Version: Odoo saas-16.1\n"
"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n"
"POT-Creation-Date: 2023-04-13 08:42+0000\n"
"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n"
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp.rst:5
msgid "Inventory & MRP"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:8
msgid "Inventory"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:10
msgid "**Odoo Inventory** is both an inventory application and a warehouse management system, with an advanced barcode scanner app. Learn how to manage lead times, automate replenishments, and configure advanced routes like drop-shipping, cross-docks, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:15
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Inventory <https://www.odoo.com/slides/inventory-24>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:16
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Barcode Scanner <https://www.odoo.com/slides/barcode-30>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode.rst:5
msgid "Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations.rst:5
msgid "Daily Operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3
msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5
msgid "To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory Adjustments*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13
msgid "If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet *Commands for Inventory*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16
msgid "Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24
msgid "If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31
msgid "If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set the quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34
msgid "Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44
msgid "When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory manually or scan the *Validate* barcode."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:6
msgid "Overview"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5
msgid "There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful. A well-known use case is the one of a point of sale which sells products in bulk, in which the customers will scale their products themselves and get the printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13
msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15
msgid "Odoo supports Barcode Nomenclatures, which determine the mapping and interpretation of the encoded information. You can configure your barcode nomenclature being in :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Barcode Nomenclature`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:20
msgid "You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to create your first rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:26
msgid "The first step is to specify the **rule name**, for example Weight Barcode with 3 Decimals. You then have to specify the type for barcode nomenclature, in our case it will be Weighted Product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:33
msgid "The Barcode Pattern is a regular expression that defines the structure of the barcode. In this example 21 defines the products on which the rule will be applied, those are the numbers by which the product barcode should start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are there simply to identify the product in question. The “N” define a number and the “D” define the decimals."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:40
msgid "The encoding allows to specify the barcode encoding on which the rule should be applied."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:44
msgid "You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the sequence. The first rule which matches the scanned barcode will be applied."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:49
msgid "Configure your Product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:51
msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52
msgid "The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to identify the product;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:53
msgid "The barcode should contain 0’s where you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case we need to set 5 zeros because we configured “21…..{NNDDD}”;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54
msgid "In EAN-13, the last number is a check number, use an EAN13 generator to know which digit it should be in your case."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:59
msgid "In case you weight 1,5 Kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following barcode 2112345015002. If you scan this barcode in your POS or when receiving products in your barcode application, Odoo will automatically create a new line for the Pasta product for a quantity of 1.5 Kg. For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be computed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:70
msgid "Rule Types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:72
msgid "**Priced Product**: allows you to identify the product and specify its price, used in POS."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:73
msgid "**Discounted Product**: allows you to create one barcode per applied discount. You can then scan your product in the POS and then scan the discount barcode, discount will be applied on the normal price of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74
msgid "**Weighted Product**: allows you to identify the product and specify its weight, used in both POS (in which the price is computed based on the weight) and in inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:75
msgid "**Client**: allows you to identify the customer, for example used with loyalty program."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76
msgid "**Cashier**: allows you to identify the cashier when entering the POS."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:77
msgid "**Location**: allows you to identify the location on a transfer when multi-location is activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78
msgid "**Package**: allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages are activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:79
msgid "**Credit Card**: doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from the Mercury module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80
msgid "**Unit Product**: allows you to identify a product for both POS and transfers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:83
msgid "When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any number of characters, those characters being any number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3
msgid "Process to Transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6
msgid "Simple Transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8
msgid "To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to *Operations*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14
msgid "Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24
msgid "From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with the stock moves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33
msgid "If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add additional steps for the different operation types."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45
msgid "Receipts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39
msgid "When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode to make it enter a sub-location of the main location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48
msgid "If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply scan the next product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery.rst:5
msgid "Delivery Orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54
msgid "When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62
msgid "Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the *Previous* and *Next* buttons."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70
msgid "Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78
msgid "Internal Transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80
msgid "When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85
msgid "If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct, you don’t need to scan them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89
msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91
msgid "If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways of working:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94
msgid "If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99
msgid "If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the lot/serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3
msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5
msgid "To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode sheet* from the home page of the app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12
msgid "Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document. Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your products to populate it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup.rst:5
msgid "Setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:3
msgid "Set up your barcode scanner"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:5
msgid "Getting started with barcode scanning in Odoo is fairly easy. Yet, a good user experience relies on an appropriate hardware setup. This guide will help you through the task of choosing and configuring the barcode scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:11
msgid "Find the barcode scanner that suits your needs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:13
msgid "The 3 recommended type of barcode scanners to work with the Odoo **Inventory** and **Barcode Scanning** apps are the **USB scanner**, **the bluetooth scanner** and the **mobile computer scanner**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:20
msgid "If you scan products at a computer location, the **USB scanner** is the way to go. Simply plug it in the computer to start scanning. Just make sure when you buy it that the scanner is compatible with your keyboard layout or can be configured to be so."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:25
msgid "The **bluetooth scanner** can be paired with a smartphone or a tablet and is a good choice if you want to be mobile but don't need a big investment. An approach is to log in Odoo on you smartphone, pair the bluetooth scanner with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with the possibility to check your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:32
msgid "For heavy use, the **mobile computer scanner** is the handiest solution. It consists of a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can turn out to be a very productive solution, however you need to make sure that is is capable of running Odoo smoothly. The most recent models using Android + Google Chrome or Windows + Internet Explorer Mobile should do the job. However, due to the variety of models and configurations on the market, it is essential to test it first."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:42
msgid "Configure your barcode scanner"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:45
msgid "Keyboard layout"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:50
msgid "An USB barcode scanner needs to be configured to use the same keyboard layout as your operating system. Otherwise, your scanner won't translate characters correctly (replacing a 'A' with a 'Q' for example). Most scanners are configured by scanning the appropriate barcode in the user manual."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:57
msgid "Automatic carriage return"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:59
msgid "By default, Odoo has a 50 milliseconds delay between each successive scan (it helps avoid accidental double scanning). If you want to suppress this delay, you can configure your scanner to insert a carriage return at the end of each barcode. This is usually the default configuration and can be explicitly configured by scanning a specific barcode in the user manual ('CR suffix ON', 'Apply Enter for suffix', etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3
msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5
msgid "The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with the barcode scanner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:14
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:14
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:9
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:42
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:84
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:17
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:14
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:23
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:9
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:10
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:31
msgid "Configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14
msgid "To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality via :menuselection:`Inventory --> Settings --> Barcode Scanner`. Once you have ticked the feature, you can hit save."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22
msgid "Set Product Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24
msgid "You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the *Inventory* app. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Configure Products Barcodes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:30
msgid "Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly at creation on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:40
msgid "Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:45
msgid "Set Locations Barcodes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:47
msgid "If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:58
msgid "You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the *Print* menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:62
msgid "Barcode Formats"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:64
msgid "Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:68
msgid "Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your own barcode format for internal use."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management.rst:5
msgid "Warehouse Management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3
msgid "Use dropshipping to ship directly from suppliers to customers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:5
msgid "Dropshipping is an order fulfillment strategy that allows sellers to have items shipped directly from suppliers to customers. Normally, a seller purchases a product from a supplier, stores it in their inventory, and ships it to the end customer once an order is placed. With dropshipping, the supplier is responsible for storing and shipping the item. This benefits the seller by reducing inventory costs, including the price of operating warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:12
msgid "Configure products to be dropshipped"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:14
msgid "To use dropshipping as a fulfillment strategy, navigate to the :guilabel:`Purchase` app and select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under the :guilabel:`Logistics` heading, click the :guilabel:`Dropshipping` checkbox, and :guilabel:`Save` to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:18
msgid "Next, go to the :guilabel:`Sales` app, click :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and choose an existing product or select :guilabel:`Create` to configure a new one. On the product page, make sure that the :guilabel:`Can be Sold` and :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` checkboxes are enabled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the \"Can be Sold\" and \"Can be Purchased\" checkboxes on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:26
msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab and specify a vendor and the price that they sell the product for. Multiple vendors can be added, but the vendor at the top of the list will be the one automatically selected for purchase orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "The product form with a vendor specified."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:34
msgid "Finally, select the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the :guilabel:`Dropship` checkbox in the :guilabel:`Routes` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the Dropship option in the product inventory tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:42
msgid "Fulfill orders using dropshipping"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44
msgid "When a customer completes an online purchase for a dropshipped product, a sales order will be automatically created with an associated request for quotation (:abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`) for the supplier. Sales orders can be viewed in the :guilabel:`Sales` app by selecting :menuselection:`Orders --> Orders`. Click the :guilabel:`Purchase` smart button at the top right of a sales order to view the associated :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:51
msgid "Dropship sales orders can also be created manually through the :guilabel:`Sales` app by selecting :menuselection:`Orders --> Orders --> Create` and adding a product configured for dropshipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "A dropship sales order with the Purchase smart button in the top right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:58
msgid "Once the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` is confirmed, it becomes a purchase order and a dropship receipt is created and linked to it. The receipt can be viewed by clicking the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button in the top right corner of the purchase order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "A dropship purchase order with the Receipt smart button in the top right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:66
msgid "The dropship receipt will list the supplier in the :guilabel:`Receive From` section and the customer in the :guilabel:`Destination Location` section. Upon delivery of the product to the customer, click on the :guilabel:`Validate` button at the top left of the dropship receipt to confirm the delivered quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Validate the dropship receipt after delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:75
msgid "To view all dropship orders, simply navigate to the :guilabel:`Inventory` dashboard and click the teal :guilabel:`# TO PROCESS` button on the :guilabel:`Dropship` card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:-1
msgid "Click the green button on the Dropship card to view all dropship orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3
msgid "How to choose the right inventory flow to handle delivery orders?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:5
msgid "Depending on factors such as the type of items you sell, the size of your warehouse, the number of orders you register everyday... the way you handle deliveries to your customers can vary a lot."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:9
msgid "Odoo allows you to handle shipping from your warehouse in 3 different ways:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:12
msgid "**One step (shipping)**: Ship directly from stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:14
msgid "**Two steps (pick + ship)**: Bring goods to output location before shipping"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:17
msgid "**Three steps (pick + pack + ship)**: Make packages into a dedicated location, then bring them to the output location for shipping"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:20
msgid "For companies having a rather small warehouse and that do not require high stock of items or don't sell perishable items, a one step shipping is the simplest solution, as it does not require a lot of configuration and allows to handle orders very quickly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:25
msgid "Using inventory methods such as FIFO, LIFO and FEFO require to have at least two steps to handle a shipment. The picking method will be determined by the removal strategy, and the items removed will then be shipped to the customer. This method is also interesting if you hold larger stocks and especially when the items you stock are big in size."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:31
msgid "The three steps system becomes useful in more specific situations, the main one being for handling very large stocks. The items are transferred to a packing area, where they will be assembled by area of destination, and then set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:53
msgid "One step flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:42
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`one_step`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:58
msgid "Two steps flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:47
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:60
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`two_steps`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:50
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:63
msgid "Three steps flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:52
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:65
msgid "Please read documentation on :doc:`three_steps`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:3
msgid "How can I change the label type?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:8
msgid "With Odoo, you can choose among different types of labels for your delivery orders. Follow the steps below and give an appropriate label type to your delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:15
msgid "In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and click on **Delivery methods**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:18
msgid "Choose a delivery method and then click on **Edit**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:23
msgid "In the **Pricing** tab, under **Fedex label stock type**, you can choose one of the label types available. The availability will vary depending on the carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:30
msgid "Once this is done, you can see the result if you go to the Sales module and you create a new sale order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:33
msgid "As you confirm the sale and validate the delivery with the carrier for which you have modified the label type, The label will appear in your history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:46
msgid "The default label type is paper letter, and if you choose the label type bottom half for example, here is the difference :"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3
msgid "Process Delivery Orders in one Step (Shipping)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5
msgid "There is no configuration needed to deliver in one step. The default outgoing shipments are configured to be directly delivered from the stock to the customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9
msgid "However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another shipping configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse in question."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14
msgid "Then, choose *Deliver goods directly* as your *Outgoing Shipments* strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:45
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:47
msgid "Create a Sales Order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23
msgid "In the *Sales* application, create a quotation with some storable products to deliver and confirm it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:26
msgid "Notice that we now see 1 delivery associated with this *sales order* in the stat button above the sales order. If you click on the 1 Delivery stat button, you should now see your delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:34
msgid "Process a Delivery"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:36
msgid "You can also find the *delivery order* directly from the *Inventory* application. In the dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the Delivery Orders Kanban card."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:43
msgid "Enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click on *Validate* to complete the move if you have products in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:49
msgid "Once you *Validate* the delivery order, the products leave your *WH/Stock location* and are moved to the *Customer location*. You can easily see that the delivery took place thanks to the status of the document which is now *Done*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3
msgid "Process Delivery Orders in three Steps (Pick + Pack + Ship)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5
msgid "When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, that process may not reflect reality and your company could require more steps before shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:11
msgid "With the delivery in 3 steps (Pick + Pack + Ship), the items will be picked to be transferred to a packing area. Then, they will be moved to an output location before being effectively shipped to the customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:15
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19
msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:17
msgid "The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will chain the picking step to the shipping step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:22
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21
msgid "To allow *multi-step routes*, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the option. Note that activating *Multi-Step Routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30
msgid "Configure Warehouse for Delivery in 3 Steps"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:32
msgid "Once *Multi-Step Routes* has been activated, you can go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the warehouse which will use delivery in 3 steps. You can then select the option *Pack goods, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* for *Outgoing Shipments*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40
msgid "Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, *Output* and *Packing Zone*. If you want to rename it go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, *Select* the one you want to rename and update its name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:47
msgid "In the *Sales* application, you can create a quotation with some storable products to deliver. Once you confirm the quotation, three pickings will be created and automatically linked to your sale order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54
msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56
msgid "The first one with a reference PICK to designate the picking process,"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58
msgid "The second one with the reference PACK that is the packing process,"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:60
msgid "The last one with a reference OUT to designate the shipping process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66
msgid "Process the Picking, Packing, and Delivery"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:68
msgid "The picking operation is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while the other ones are *Waiting Another Operation*. The Packing operation will become *Ready* as soon as the picking one is marked as done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:73
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71
msgid "You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the inventory dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77
msgid "In case you have the product in stock, it has automatically been reserved and you can simply validate the picking document."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:85
msgid "Once the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be processed. Thanks to the fact that the documents are chained, the products which have been previously picked are automatically reserved on the packing order which can be directly validated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:96
msgid "Once the packing has been validated, the delivery order is ready to be processed. Here again, it is directly ready to be validated in order to transfer the products to the customer location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3
msgid "Process Delivery Orders in two Steps (Pick + Ship)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:5
msgid "When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:9
msgid "However, your company's business process may have one or more steps that happen before shipping. In the two steps process, the products which are part of the delivery order are picked in the warehouse and brought to an output location before being effectively shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:35
msgid "Warehouse configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:31
msgid "Once *Multi-Step Routes* has been activated, you can go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the warehouse which will use delivery in 2 steps. You can then select the option *Send goods in output and then deliver (2 steps)* for Outgoing Shipments."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:39
msgid "Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Output* location. If you want to rename it go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`, Select Output and update its name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:49
msgid "In the *Sales* application, you can create a quotation with some storable products to deliver. Once you confirm the quotation, two pickings will be created and automatically linked to your sale order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56
msgid "If you click on the *2 Delivery* button, you should now see two different pickings, one with a reference *PICK* to designate the picking process and another one with a reference *OUT* to designate the shipping process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65
msgid "Process the Picking and the Delivery"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:67
msgid "The picking operation is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while the delivery operation will only become *Ready* once the picking operation has been marked as done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:83
msgid "Once the picking has been validated, the delivery order is ready to be processed. Thanks to the fact that the documents are chained, the products which have been previously picked are automatically reserved on the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming.rst:5
msgid "Incoming Shipments"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:3
msgid "How to choose the right flow to handle receipts?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:8
msgid "Depending on factors such as the type of items you receive, the size of your warehouse, the number of receipt you register everyday... the way you handle receipts to your customers can vary a lot."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:12
msgid "Odoo allows you to handle receipts from your warehouse in 3 different ways:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:15
msgid "**One step**: Receive goods directly in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:17
msgid "**Two steps**: Unload in input location then go to stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:19
msgid "**Three steps**: Unload in input location, go through a quality control before being admitted in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:22
msgid "Odoo uses **routes** to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. In standard, the reception is a one step process, but changing the configuration can allow to have 2 or even 3 steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:27
msgid "The principles are the following:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:29
msgid "**One step**: You receive the goods directly in your stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:31
msgid "**Two steps**: You receive the goods in an input area then transfer them from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further processing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:36
msgid "**Three steps**: In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed with the suppliers. Adding a quality control step in the goods receipt process can become essential."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:42
msgid "You receive the goods in an input area, then transfer them into quality area for quality control. When your quality check process finishes then you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to Stock the quantity that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:55
msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68
msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:69
msgid ":doc:`/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3
msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5
msgid "There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors to the stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9
msgid "However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step receipt configuration. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse in question."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14
msgid "Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:50
msgid "Create a Purchase Order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23
msgid "To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm the *RfQ*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27
msgid "Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35
msgid "Process a Receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37
msgid "You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44
msgid "Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from suppliers are considered as being always available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:49
msgid "If you have :guilabel:`Storage Locations` activated, you can click the hamburger menu next to the :guilabel:`Done quantity` to specify the location(s) where you are storing the received product(s)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:56
msgid "Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3
msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5
msgid "Quality is essential for most companies. To make sure we maintain quality throughout the supply chain, it only makes sense that we assess the quality of the products received from suppliers. To do so, we will add a quality control step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:9
msgid "Odoo uses routes to define how to handle the different receipt steps. Configuration of those routes is done at the warehouse level. By default, the reception is a one-step process, but it can also be configured to have two-steps or three-steps processes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13
msgid "The three-steps flow works as follows: you receive the goods in your receiving area, then transfer them into a quality area for quality control (QC). When the quality check is completed, the goods that match the QC requirements are moved to stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:20
msgid "The first step is to allow the use of *Multi-Step Routes*. Routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will chain the picking step to the shipping step."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23
msgid "To enable *Multi-Step Routes*, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the features to enable in order to use multi-step routes for goods reception"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31
msgid "By default, activating *Multi-Step Routes* also activates *Storage Locations*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:35
msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 3-steps"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:37
msgid "Once *Multi-Step Routes* has been activated, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the warehouse which should work with the 3-steps reception. Then, select *Receive goods in input, then quality and then stock (3 steps)* for *Incoming Shipments*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the incoming shipment strategy to choose to receive goods in three steps"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:45
msgid "Activating this option leads to the creation of two new locations: *Input* and *Quality Control*. To rename them, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations` and select the one you want to rename."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:52
msgid "To start the 3-steps reception process, create a *Request for Quotation* from the *Purchase* app, add some storable products to it and confirm. Then, three pickings are created with your *Purchase Order* as the source document:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56
msgid "The first one with a reference *IN* to designate the receipt process;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:59
msgid "The second one with a reference *INT*, which is the move to the quality control zone;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62
msgid "The last one with a reference *INT* to designate the move to stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the three moves created by the purchase of products in three steps strategy"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69
msgid "Process the receipt, quality control and entry in stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71
msgid "As the receipt operation is the first one to be processed, it has a *Ready* status while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:74
msgid "To access the receipt operation, click on the button from the *Purchase Order* or go back to the *Inventory* app dashboard and click on *Receipts*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the button to click to see the receipts that need to be processed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:81
msgid "In the receipt order, products are always considered available because they come from the supplier. Then, the receipt can be validated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the move (internal transfer) from the reception area to the warehouse input area"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:88
msgid "Once the receipt has been validated, the transfer to quality becomes *Ready*. And, because the documents are chained to each other, products previously received are automatically reserved on the transfer. Then, the transfer can be directly validated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the button to click to see the internal transfers that need to be processed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the move (internal transfer) from the input area to the quality control area"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:100
msgid "Now, the transfer that enters the products to stock is *Ready*. Here, it is again ready to be validated in order to transfer the products to your stock location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:-1
msgid "View of the move (internal transfer) from the quality control area to the stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3
msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8
msgid "Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow you to have 2 steps."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13
msgid "The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further processing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21
msgid "The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26
msgid "To allow *multi-step routes*, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34
msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36
msgid "Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse` and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* for *Incoming Shipments*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44
msgid "Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. If you want to rename it, you can go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Locations --> Select Input` and update its name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52
msgid "Create a purchase order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54
msgid "In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to your purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62
msgid "Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the products to *Stock*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68
msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70
msgid "The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been marked as *Done*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74
msgid "You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it through the inventory dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80
msgid "By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87
msgid "Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments.rst:5
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:3
msgid "Inventory adjustments"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:5
msgid "In any warehouse management system, the recorded inventory counts in the database might not always match the actual inventory counts in the warehouse. The discrepancy between the two counts can be due to theft, damages, human errors, or other factors. As such, inventory adjustments must be made to reconcile the differences, and ensure that the recorded counts in the database match the actual counts in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, inventory adjustments can be accessed through :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:14
msgid "The :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page shows all products that are currently in stock. Each line contains the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:17
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:18
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot/Serial Number`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:19
msgid ":guilabel:`On Hand Quantity`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:22
msgid "Add a new line"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:24
msgid "To add an inventory adjustment line, click :guilabel:`Create` and fill in the :guilabel:`Product` and :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` fields. Then click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:27
msgid "At this stage, the count is recorded but not yet *applied*. Meaning the quantity on hand is not yet updated to match the new :guilabel:`Counted Quantity`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:30
msgid "To apply the new :guilabel:`Counted Quantity`, click :guilabel:`Apply` on the line or the :guilabel:`Apply All` button on the top of the page. If :guilabel:`Apply All` is clicked, a reference or reason can be entered before clicking :guilabel:`Apply`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Apply all option applies the inventory adjustment once a reason is specified."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:40
msgid "Count products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:42
msgid "Counting products is a recurring activity in a warehouse. Once a count is complete, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Inventory Adjustments` to update the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` column for each product line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:46
msgid "If a count matches the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` recorded in the database, click on :guilabel:`Set`, which will copy the value in the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` field and paste it in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` field. A move with `0.00` :guilabel:`Quantity Done` will be recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:51
msgid "If a count does *not* match the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` recorded in the database, record the count in the :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` field. When :guilabel:`Apply` is clicked, a move with the difference between the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` and :guilabel:`Counted Quantity` will be recorded in the product's inventory adjustment history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Inventory Adjustments History dashboard detailing a list of prior product moves."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:61
msgid "Sometimes a count occurs, but can not be applied in the database right away. In the time between the actual count and applying the inventory adjustment, product moves can occur. In that case, the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` in the database can change and will not be consistent with the counted quantity. As an extra caution measure, Odoo will ask for confirmation before applying the inventory adjustment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:68
msgid "Plan counts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:70
msgid "Each inventory adjustment line contains the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:72
msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: the date at which a count should be made."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:73
msgid ":guilabel:`User`: the person in charge of the count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:74
msgid ":guilabel:`Accounting Date`: the date at which the adjustments will be accounted. The column is hidden by default, but can be made visible by opening the column options icon."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:78
msgid "In the Barcode app, users can only view counts assigned to them that are scheduled for today or earlier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:81
msgid "To plan big counts, select the desired product lines on the :guilabel:`Inventory Adjustments` page. Then, click :guilabel:`Request a Count` and fill in the following information:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:84
msgid ":guilabel:`Inventory Date`: the planned date of the count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:85
msgid ":guilabel:`User`: the user responsible for the count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:86
msgid ":guilabel:`Accounting Date`: the date at which the inventory adjustment will be accounted."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:87
msgid ":guilabel:`Count`: to leave the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` of each product line blank, select :guilabel:`Leave Empty`. To prefill the :guilabel:`On Hand Quantity` of each product line with the current value recorded in the database, select :guilabel:`Set Current Value`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:91
msgid "Finally, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to request the count."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:93
msgid "By default, after an inventory adjustment is applied, the scheduled date for the next count is the 31st of December of the current year. To modify the default scheduled date, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Operations` and change the date in the :guilabel:`Annual Inventory Day and Month` setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/count_products.rst:-1
msgid "Adjust the next inventory count date with the Annual Inventory Day and Month setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:3
msgid "Cycle counts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:5
msgid "In most companies, the stock is only counted once a year. That's why by default, after making an inventory adjustment in Odoo, the scheduled date for the next count is set on the 31st of December. However, for some businesses it's crucial to have an accurate inventory count at all times."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:10
msgid "The goal of cycle counts is to keep critical stock levels accurate by counting more often at key locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:16
msgid "In Odoo, cycle counts are location-based. The frequency of the counts is defined by the storage location. To activate storage locations, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse` and activate the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` setting. Next, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:-1
msgid "Enable Storage Locations in Odoo settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:26
msgid "Change the inventory frequency"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:28
msgid "To change a location's inventory frequency, first, go to the locations by clicking :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:31
msgid "Then, click on a location to open the location settings. Next, click on :guilabel:`Edit`. In the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` field, set the number of days. For example, a location that needs an inventory count every 30 days would set the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` value to `30`. Once the value is entered, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting to the location. Now, once an inventory adjustment is applied to this location, the next scheduled count date will be automatically set based on the number of days in the :guilabel:`Inventory Frequency (Days)` setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/inventory_adjustments/cycle_counts.rst:-1
msgid "Edit a location to change the inventory frequency."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:5
msgid "Lots and Serial Numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:3
msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6
msgid "Introduction"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:8
msgid "In Odoo, lots and serial numbers have similarities in their functional system but are different in their behavior. They are both managed within the **Inventory**, **Purchases** and **Sales** app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:12
msgid "**Lots** correspond to a certain number of products you received and store altogether in one single pack."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:15
msgid "**Serial numbers** are identification numbers given to one product in particular, to allow to track the history of the item from reception to delivery and after-sales."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:20
msgid "When to use"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:22
msgid "**Lots** are interesting for products you receive in great quantity and for which a lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other info. Lots will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a production fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:28
msgid "**Serial numbers** are interesting for items that could require after-sales service, such as smartphones, laptops, fridges, and any electronic devices. You could use the manufacturer's serial number or your own, depending on the way you manage these products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:34
msgid "When not to use"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:36
msgid "Storing consumable products such as kitchen roll, toilet paper, pens and paper blocks in lots would make no sense at all, as there are very few chances that you can return them for production fault."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:40
msgid "On the other hand, giving a serial number to every product is a time-consuming task that will have a purpose only in the case of items that have a warranty and/or after-sales services. Putting a serial number on bread, for instance, makes no sense at all."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46
msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47
msgid ":doc:`lots`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3
msgid "Expiration Dates"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5
msgid "In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be managed based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking and managing product stock based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:9
msgid "With Odoo, you can track and manage your products based on their expiration dates, even if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:16
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18
msgid "Application configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:18
msgid "To use expiration date tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and *Expiration Dates* features."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:26
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90
msgid "Product configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:28
msgid "Now, you can define different dates in the *inventory tab* of the product form:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:30
msgid "Product Use Time: the number of days before the goods start deteriorating, without being dangerous. This is used to calculate the Best before date on each lot/serial number received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32
msgid "Product Life Time: the number of days before the goods may become dangerous and must not be consumed. This is used to calculate the Expiration date on each lot/serial number received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34
msgid "Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be removed from the stock. This is used to calculate the Removal date on each lot/serial number received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36
msgid "Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be raised on the lot/serial number. This is used to calculate the Alert date on each lot/serial number received. Once the Alert date is reached, an Activity is assigned on the relevant lot/serial number to the Responsible user defined on the Product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:45
msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:47
msgid "When receiving a product into inventory, the dates will automatically be updated on the corresponding lot/serial number. These updates will be based on the receipt date of the product and the days set on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58
msgid "Expiration Alerts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60
msgid "You can access expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Master Data --> Lots/Serial Numbers`. There, you can use the pre-existing filter to show all the lots/serial numbers that have exceeded their respective alert dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3
msgid "Manage lots of identical products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5
msgid "Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11
msgid "Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14
msgid "The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced traceability."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18
msgid "Setting Up"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21
msgid "Application Configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23
msgid "First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. Then, click on save."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31
msgid "Product Configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33
msgid "Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial numbers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products` and open the product of your choice. There, click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47
msgid "Manage Lots"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52
msgid "In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot numbers. You have several ways of doing so:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65
msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57
msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59
msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67
msgid "When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add a line* again to register a new lot number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75
msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77
msgid "Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are contained in each one of the lots."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93
msgid "Operation Types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95
msgid "Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Operation Types`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99
msgid "For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111
msgid "Lots traceability"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113
msgid "The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were shipped to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117
msgid "To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in :menuselection:`Master Data --> Lots/Serial Numbers`, click on the lot number corresponding to your search."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124
msgid "When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the lot number has been used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130
msgid "Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the *Location* stat button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3
msgid "Work with serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5
msgid "To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its last movement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11
msgid "If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-entry management is the feature you need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15
msgid "Configurations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20
msgid "First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the feature and hit save."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30
msgid "Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products` and open the product of your choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the *Inventory tab*. Then, click on save."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42
msgid "Manage Serial Numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47
msgid "To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50
msgid "Manual assignation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73
msgid "Multi-assignation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89
msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56
msgid "Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly need to open the detailed operations of your picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63
msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65
msgid "When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75
msgid "By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial number to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80
msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91
msgid "To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106
msgid "Operation types"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108
msgid "You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each operation type. To define it, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Operation Types` in the *Inventory* app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112
msgid "For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120
msgid "If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124
msgid "Serial Number traceability"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126
msgid "Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130
msgid "Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to :menuselection:`Master Data --> Lots/Serial Numbers` and click on the serial number corresponding to your search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in which documents the serial number has been used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:140
msgid "And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the *Location* button available on the serial number form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc.rst:5
msgid "Miscellaneous Operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:3
msgid "Process Batch Transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:5
msgid "Batch picking allows a single picker to handle a batch of orders, reducing the number of times he must visit the same location. In Odoo, it means you can regroup several transfers into the same batch transfer, then process it, either via the barcode application or in the form view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:11
msgid "Create a Batch Transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:13
msgid "To activate the batch picking option, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Configuration` and enable *Batch Pickings*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of the inventory settings. Process to enable the batch pickings option in the Odoo Inventory app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:20
msgid "Then, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Batch Transfers` and hit the create button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of the new menu, Batch Transfers, under operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:27
msgid "Now, determine the batch transfer responsible and the type of transfers you want to include in the batch. To add the types of transfers, click on *Add a line*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of a Batch Transfers form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:34
msgid "In the example below, a filter was applied to only see the transfers that are in the *Pick* step. After that, the different transfers that needed to be included in the batch transfer were selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of the list of transfers to choose for a single batch transfer and how to add them\n"
"to the batch transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:42
msgid "To see the products to pick for the different transfers, click on *Select*. If *Multi-locations* has been activated, the document also shows the locations they have been reserved from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of a batch transfer list. Products to pick with their source and target locations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:51
msgid "Create a Batch Transfer from the Transfers List View"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:53
msgid "From the *Transfers List View*, select transfers that should be included in the Batch. Then, select *Add to batch* from the *Action* list."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of the process to add transfers to a batch transfer from the transfers list view"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:61
msgid "Next, determine if you want to add the transfers to an existing draft batch transfer or create a new one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Option to add a responsible to a batch transfer so it can be confirmed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:69
msgid "Process a Batch Transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:71
msgid "While gathering the products, you can edit the batch transfer and update the *Quantity done* for each product. Once everything has been picked, select *Validate* so the different transfers contained in the batch are validated too."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of an in progress batch transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:80
msgid "In case all the products cannot be picked, you can create backorders for each individual transfer which couldn’t be completely processed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "How to handle batch transfers with unavailable products. Creation of a backorder inside\n"
"of a batch transfer"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of how backorders are handled in Odoo's batch transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:93
msgid "Process a Batch Transfer from the Barcode app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:95
msgid "Enter the *Barcode* application, select the *Batch Transfers* menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of the Odoo Barcode app dashboard"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:101
msgid "Then, you can enter the batch transfer on which you want to work. Batch transfers can easily be grouped per responsible if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of the batch transfers dashboard inside of the Barcode app"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:108
msgid "In the batch transfer, products are classified per location. The source document is visible on each line and a color-code helps differentiate them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of an in progress batch transfer with the Odoo Barcode application"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:116
msgid "To see the products to pick from another location, click on the *Next* button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of a ready and completed batch transfer inside of the Odoo Barcode application"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/batch_transfers.rst:123
msgid "Once all the products have been picked, click on *Validate* (on the last page) to mark the batch transfer as done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3
msgid "Consignment: buy and sell stock without owning it"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5
msgid "Most of the time, products stored in a company's warehouse are either purchased from suppliers, or are manufactured in-house. However, suppliers will sometimes let companies store and sell products in the company's warehouse, without having to buy those items up-front. This is called *consignment*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:10
msgid "Consignment is a useful method for suppliers to launch new products, and easily deliver to their customers. It's also a great way for the company storing the products (the consignee) to earn something back for their efforts. Consignees can even charge a fee for the convenience of storing products they don't actually own."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:16
msgid "Enable the consignment setting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18
msgid "To receive, store, and sell consignment stock, the feature needs to be enabled in the settings. To do this, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and under the :guilabel:`Traceability` section, check the box next to :guilabel:`Consignment`, and then click :guilabel:`Save` to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Enabled Consignment setting in Inventory configuration."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28
msgid "Receive (and store) consignment stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30
msgid "With the feature enabled in Odoo, consignment stock can now be received into a warehouse. From the main :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard, click into the :guilabel:`Receipts` section. Then, click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:35
msgid "Consignment stock is not actually purchased from the vendor; it is simply received and stored. Because of this, there are no quotations or purchase orders involved in receiving consignment stock. So, *every* receipt of consignment stock will start by creating manual receipts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39
msgid "Choose a vendor to enter in the :guilabel:`Receive From` field, and then choose the same vendor to enter in the :guilabel:`Assign Owner` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:43
msgid "Since the products received from the vendor will be owned by the same vendor, the :guilabel:`Receive From` and :guilabel:`Assign Owner` fields must match."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:46
msgid "Once the vendor-related fields are set, enter products into the :guilabel:`Product` lines, and set the quantities to be received into the warehouse under the :guilabel:`Done` column. If the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` feature is enabled, the :abbr:`UoM (Units of Measure)` can be changed, as well. Once all the consignment stock has been received, :guilabel:`Validate` the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Matching vendor fields in consignment Receipt creation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:56
msgid "Sell and deliver consignment stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:58
msgid "Once consignment stock has been received into the warehouse, it can be sold the same as any other in-stock product that has the :guilabel:`Can Be Sold` option enabled on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:61
msgid "To create a sales order, navigate to the :menuselection:`Sales` app, and from the :guilabel:`Quotations` overview, click :guilabel:`Create`. Next, choose a customer to enter into the :guilabel:`Customer` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:66
msgid "The :guilabel:`Customer` *must* be different from the :guilabel:`Vendor` that supplied the consignment stock received (and stored) in the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:69
msgid "Add the consignment product under the :guilabel:`Product` column in the order lines, set the :guilabel:`Quantity`, and fill out any other pertinent product details on the form. Once the quotation is complete, click :guilabel:`Confirm`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Sales order of consignment stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:77
msgid "Once the :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)` has been confirmed, it will become a sales order. From here, the products can be delivered by clicking on the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button, and selecting :guilabel:`Validate` to validate the delivery."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:82
msgid "Traceability and reporting of consignment stock"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:84
msgid "Although consignment stock is owned by the vendor who supplied it, and not by the company storing it in their warehouse, consignment products will *still* appear in certain inventory reports."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:87
msgid "To find inventory reports, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting`, and choose a report to view."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:91
msgid "Since the consignee does not actually own consigment stock, these products are *not* reflected in the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` report, and have no impact on the consignee's inventory valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:96
msgid "Product moves report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:98
msgid "To view all information about on-hand stock moves, navigate to the the :guilabel:`Product Moves` dashboard by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Product Moves`. For consignment products, the information in this report is the same as any other product: the history of its product moves can be reviewed; the :guilabel:`Quantity Done` and :guilabel:`Reference` document are available; and its :guilabel:`Locations` are available, as well. The consignment stock will originate from :guilabel:`Partner Location/Vendors`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:106
msgid "To view a consignment product's moves by ownership, select the :guilabel:`Group By` filter, choose the :guilabel:`Add Custom Group` parameter, and then select :guilabel:`From Owner`, and :guilabel:`Apply` to finish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:-1
msgid "Consignment stock moves history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:115
msgid "To see forecasted units of consignment stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Forecasted Inventory`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:119
msgid "Stock on hand report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:121
msgid "View the :guilabel:`Stock On Hand` dashboard by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Reporting --> Inventory Report`. From this report, the :guilabel:`Locations` of all stock on-hand are displayed, in addition to the quantities per location. For consigment products, the :guilabel:`Owner` column will be populated with the owner of those products, or the original vendor who supplied the products in the first place."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:3
msgid "Process wave transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:5
msgid "While a batch transfer is a group of several pickings, a **wave transfer** only contains some parts of different pickings. Both methods are used to pick orders in a warehouse, and depending on the situation, one method may be a better fit than the other."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:9
msgid "To handle orders of a specific product category, or fetch products that are at the same location, wave transfers are the ideal method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:12
msgid "In Odoo, wave transfers are actually batch transfers with an extra step: transfers are split before being grouped in a batch."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:18
msgid "Before a wave transfer can be created, the :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` and :guilabel:`Wave Transfers` options must be activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:21
msgid "First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. In the :guilabel:`Operations` section, enable :guilabel:`Batch Transfers` and :guilabel:`Wave Transfers`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "View of Odoo Inventory app settings to enable the wave transfers option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:30
msgid "Add products to a wave"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:32
msgid "Now that the settings are activated, start a wave transfer by adding products to a wave."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:34
msgid "Wave transfers can only contain product lines from transfers of the same operation type. To view all the transfers and product lines in a specific operation, first go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` dashboard and locate the desired operation type's card. Then, open the options menu (the three dots icon in the corner of the operation type's card) and click :guilabel:`Operations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "How to get an operation type's list of operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:43
msgid "On the operations page, select the product lines you want to add in a new or existing wave. Then, click :guilabel:`Add to Wave`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:-1
msgid "Select lines to add to the wave."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:51
msgid "Use the :guilabel:`Filters` in the search bar to group lines with the same product, location, carrier, etc..."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:54
msgid "After that, a pop-up box appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:56
msgid "To add the selected lines to an existing wave transfer, select the :guilabel:`an existing wave transfer` option and select the existing wave transfer from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:59
msgid "To create a new wave transfer, select the :guilabel:`a new wave transfer` option. If creating a new wave transfer, an employee can also be set in the optional :guilabel:`Responsible` field. Once the desired options are selected, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to add the product lines to a wave."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:64
msgid "View wave transfers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/wave_transfers.rst:66
msgid "To view all wave transfers and their statuses, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Wave Transfers`. Wave transfers can also be viewed in the :guilabel:`Barcode` app by going to :menuselection:`Barcode --> Batch Transfers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning.rst:5
msgid "Planning"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:3
msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:5
msgid "Providing the best possible service to customers is vital for business. It implies planning every move: manufacturing orders, deliveries, receptions, and so on. To do so, you need to configure lead time properly and coordinate scheduled dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:9
msgid "By using lead times, Odoo provides end dates, the **Commitment Date**, for each process. On a sales order, for example, this is the date your customer will get the products he ordered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:13
msgid "From the customers’ side, the commitment date is important because it gives them an estimation of when they will receive their products. The dates take all other lead times, such as manufacturing, delivery, or suppliers, into account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:19
msgid "How are Lead Times Calculated?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:27
msgid "As said above, there are several types of lead times. Each is calculated based on various indicators. Before going through the configuration, here is a brief summary of how lead times are calculated and what they are:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:32
msgid "**Customer Lead Time**: the customer lead time is the default duration you set. Therefore, the expected date on the sales orders is today + customer lead time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:36
msgid "**Sales Security Lead Time**: the purpose is to be ready shipping that many days before the actual commitment taken with the customer. Then, the default scheduled date on the delivery order is **SO delivery date - Security Lead Time**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:41
msgid "**Purchase Security Lead Time**: margin of error for vendor lead times. When the system generates Purchase Orders for procuring products, they will be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:46
msgid "**Purchase Delivery Lead Time**: this is the expected time between a PO being confirmed and the receipt of the ordered products. The **Receipt scheduled date - Vendor delivery date** is the default *PO Order By* date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:51
msgid "**Days to Purchase**: number of days the purchasing department takes to validate a PO. If another RFQ to the same vendor is already opened, Odoo adds the line to the RFQ instead of creating a new one. Then, the specific date is set on the line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:56
msgid "**Manufacturing Lead Time**: this is the expected time it takes to manufacture a product. This lead time is independent of the quantity to produce and does not take the routing time into account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:61
msgid "**Manufacturing Security Lead Time**: additional time to mitigate the risk of a manufacturing delay. In case of a *Replenish to Order*, the **Delivery Order scheduled date - Manufacturing Lead Time - Manufacturing Security Lead Time** is the default *Manufacturing Order* planned date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:68
msgid "Sales - Lead Times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:70
msgid "In the *Sales* app, there is an option called *Delivery Date*. It allows seeing an additional field on the sales orders, *Expected Date*. This one is automatically computed based on the different lead times previously configured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the delivery settings to have the delivery lead time taken into account"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:79
msgid "If the set up *Delivery Date* is earlier than the the *Expected Date*, a warning message is displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the error that occurs when trying to choose an earlier date than what calculated\n"
"by Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:87
msgid "But, for all of this properly working, it is still necessary to configure all the lead times that could occur."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:91
msgid "Customer Lead Time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:93
msgid "The *Customer Lead Time* is the time needed for your product to go from your warehouse to the customer place. It can be configured on any product by going to :menuselection:`Sales --> Products --> Products`. There, open your product form, go in the inventory tab, and add your *Customer Lead Time*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the customer lead time configuration from the product form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:103
msgid "For example, product B is ordered on the 2nd of April but the *Customer Lead Time* is two days. In that case, the expected delivery date is the 4th of April."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:108
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:180
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:217
msgid "Security Lead Time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:110
msgid "In sales, *Security Lead Time* corresponds to backup days to ensure you are able to deliver the products in time. The purpose is to be ready shipping earlier in order to arrive on time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:114
msgid "The number of security days is subtracted from the calculation to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one promised to the customer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:117
msgid "To set this up, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and enable the feature *Security Lead Time for Sales*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the security lead time for sales configuration from the sales settings"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:124
msgid "For example, product B is scheduled to be delivered on the 6th of April but the *Security Lead Time* is one day. In that case, the scheduled date for the delivery order is the 5th of April."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:129
msgid "Deliver several products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:131
msgid "In many cases, customers order several products at the same time. Those can have different lead times but still need to be delivered, at once or separately. Fortunately, Odoo can help you handle these cases easily."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:135
msgid "From the *Other Info* tab of your *Sale Order*, you can choose between *When all products are ready* and *As soon as possible*. The first one is to deliver products at once, while the second is to deliver them separately."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:140
msgid "For example, products A and B are ordered at the same time. A has 8 lead days and B has 5. With the first option, the *Expected Date* is calculated based on the product with the most lead days, here A. If the order is confirmed on the 2nd of April, then the *Expected Date* is on the 10th of April."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:146
msgid "With the second option, the *Expected Date* is calculated based on the product with the least customer lead days. In this example, B is the product with the least lead days. So, the *Expected Date* is on the 7th of April."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:152
msgid "Purchase - Lead Times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:155
msgid "Supplier Lead Time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:157
msgid "The *Supplier Lead Time* is the time needed for a product you purchased to be delivered. To configure it, open a product from :menuselection:`Purchase --> Products --> Products` and add a vendor under the *Purchase* tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the way to add vendors to products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:166
msgid "By clicking on *Add a line*, a new window is displayed. You can specify the *Delivery Lead Time* there. If done so, the delivery day for every purchase of that product is now equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + Delivery Lead Time*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the delivery lead time configuration from a vendor form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:176
msgid "It is possible to add different vendors and, thus, different lead times depending on the vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:182
msgid "The *Security Lead Time* for purchase follows the same logic as the one for *Sales*, except that you are the customer. Then, it is the margin of error for your supplier to deliver your order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:186
msgid "To set up *Security Lead Time* for purchase, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and enable the feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the security lead time for purchase from the inventory settings"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:194
msgid "Doing so, every time the system generates purchase orders, those are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:198
msgid "Manufacturing - Lead Times"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:201
msgid "Manufacturing Lead Time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:203
msgid "The *Manufacturing Lead Time* is the time needed to manufacture the product. To specify it, open the *Inventory* tab of your product form and add the number of days the manufacturing takes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the manufacturing lead time configuration from the product form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:211
msgid "When working with *Manufacturing Lead Times*, the *Deadline Start* of the *MO* is **Commitment Date - Manufacturing Lead Time**. For example, the MO’s deadline start date for an order having a commitment date on the 10th of July is June 27th."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:219
msgid "The *Security Lead Time* for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing orders earlier to cope with the risk of manufacturing delays."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:223
msgid "To enable it, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings` and tick *Security Lead Time*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:-1
msgid "View of the security lead time for manufacturing from the manufacturing app settings"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:230
msgid "For example, a customer orders B with a delivery date scheduled on the 20th of June. The *Manufacturing Lead Time* is 14 days and the *Security Lead Time* is 3 days, so the manufacturing of B needs to start at the latest on the 3rd of June, which is the MO’s planned date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:236
msgid "Global Example"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:238
msgid "Here is a configuration:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:240
msgid "1 day of security lead time for Sales"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:241
msgid "2 days of security lead time for Manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:242
msgid "3 days of manufacturing lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:243
msgid "1 day of security lead time for Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:244
msgid "4 days of supplier lead time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:246
msgid "Let’s say that a customer orders B on the 1st of September and the delivery date is planned to be within 20 days (September 20th). In such a scenario, here is when all the various steps are triggered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:250
msgid "**September 1st**: the sales order is created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:251
msgid "**September 10th**: the deadline to order components from the supplier because of the manufacturing process (4 days of supplier lead time)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:254
msgid "**September 13th**: the reception of the product from the supplier (1 day of security lead time for Purchase)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:256
msgid "**September 14th**: the deadline start date for the manufacturing (19th - 3 days of manufacturing lead time - 2 days of security lead time for Manufacturing)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/planning/scheduled_dates.rst:259
msgid "**September 19th**: the expected date on the delivery order form (1 day of security lead time for sales)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products.rst:5
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products.rst:5
msgid "Products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3
msgid "Select a replenishment strategy"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo, there are two strategies for replenishing inventory: **Reordering Rules** and the **Make to Order (MTO)** route. Although these strategies differ slightly, they both have similar consequences: triggering the automatic creation of a purchase or manufacturing order. The choice of which strategy to use depends on the business's manufacturing and delivery processes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:11
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:6
msgid "Terminology"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:14
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:48
msgid "Replenishment report and reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:16
msgid "The replenishment report is a list of all products that have a negative forecast quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:18
msgid "Reordering rules are used to ensure that there's always a minimum amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture products and/or fulfill sales orders. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum, Odoo automatically generates a purchase order with the quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:23
msgid "Reordering rules can be created and managed in the replenishment report or from the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:26
msgid "Make to Order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:28
msgid "Make to Order (MTO) is a procurement route that creates a draft purchase order or manufacturing order each time a sales order is confirmed, *regardless of the current stock level*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:31
msgid "Unlike products replenished using reordering rules, Odoo automatically links the sales order to the purchase order (PO) or manufacturing order (MO) generated by the MTO route. Another difference between reordering rules and MTO is with MTO, Odoo generates a draft :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` or :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` immediately after the sales order is confirmed. With reordering rules, Odoo generates a draft :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` or :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` when the product's forecasted stock falls below the set minimum quantity. In addition, Odoo will automatically add quantities to the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`/:abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` as the forecast changes, as long as the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`/:abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` is not confirmed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:41
msgid "The MTO route is the best replenishment strategy for products that are customized and should be used for this purpose only."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:50
msgid "To access the replenishment report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Replenishment`. By default, the replenishment report shows every product that needs to be manually reordered. If there is no specific rule for a product, Odoo assumes that the :guilabel:`Minimum Quantity` and :guilabel:`Maximum Quantity` stock are both `0.00`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "The replenishment report shows products that need to be reordered manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60
msgid "For products that don't have a set reordering rule, Odoo calculates the forecast as sales orders, deliveries, and receipts are confirmed. For products that have a set reordering rule, Odoo calculates the forecast normally, but also takes into account the purchase/manufacturing lead time and security lead time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:65
msgid "Before creating a new reordering rule, make sure the product has a vendor or a bill of materials configured on the product form. Also, make sure the :guilabel:`Product Type` is set to `Storable Product` on the product form. By definition, a consumable product does not have its inventory levels tracked, so Odoo can not account for a consumable product in the stock valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70
msgid "To create a new reordering rule from the replenishment report, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Replenishment`, click :guilabel:`Create`, and set the :guilabel:`Product`. If desired, set a :guilabel:`Min Quantity` and a :guilabel:`Max Quantity`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:75
msgid "To create a new reordering rule from the product form, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, select a product to open its product form, click the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button, and click :guilabel:`Create`. Then, fill out the fields and save the new reordering rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:80
msgid "By default, the quantity in the :guilabel:`To Order` field is the quantity required to reach the set :guilabel:`Max Quantity`. However, the :guilabel:`To Order` quantity can be adjusted by clicking on the field, changing the value, and clicking :guilabel:`Save`. To replenish a product manually, click :guilabel:`Order Once`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:85
msgid "To automate replenishment, click :guilabel:`Automate Orders`. When this button is clicked, Odoo will automatically generate a draft :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`/:abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` every time the forecasted stock level falls below the set :guilabel:`Min Quantity` of the reordering rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:91
msgid "A reordering rule can be temporarily deactivated for a given period by using the :guilabel:`Snooze` button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Snooze feature to temporarily deactivate reordering rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:98
msgid "A :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` or :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` created by a manual replenishment will have `Replenishment Report` as the source document. A :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` or :abbr:`MO (Manufacturing Order)` created by an automated reordering rule will have the sales order(s) reference number(s) that triggered the rule as the source document."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Look at the source panel showing where RFQ/MFG orders originated from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:108
msgid "Make to order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:110
msgid "Since the Make to Order (MTO) route is only recommended for customized products, the route is hidden by default."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:113
msgid "To activate the Make to Order (MTO) route in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:115
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:116
msgid "Activate :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:117
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:118
msgid "Click on :menuselection:`Filters --> Archived` to show archived routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:119
msgid "Select the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`, and click on :menuselection:`Action --> Unarchive`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:123
msgid "Activating the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting also activates :guilabel:`Storage Locations` setting. If these features aren't applicable to the warehouse, disable these settings after unarchiving the MTO route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:127
msgid "To set a product's procurement route to MTO, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, click on a product to open the product form, and click :guilabel:`Edit`. Then, click on the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and in the :guilabel:`Routes` options, select :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)`. For products purchased directly from a vendor, make sure the :guilabel:`Buy` route is selected in addition to the MTO route and a vendor is configured in the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab. For products manufactured in-house, make sure the :guilabel:`Manufacture` route is selected in addition to the MTO route and a bill of materials is configured for the product. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the Replenish on Order (MTO) route on the product settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3
msgid "Use different units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5
msgid "In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary. For example, a business can buy products from a country that uses the metric system, and then sell those products in a country that uses the imperial system, so the business needs to convert the units. Another case for unit conversion is when a business buys products in a big pack from a supplier and then sells those products in individual units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:11
msgid "Odoo can be set up to use different units of measure for one product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16
msgid "To use different units of measure in Odoo, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Products` and activate the :guilabel:`Units of Measure` setting. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Enable Units of Measure in the Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25
msgid "Units of measure categories"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27
msgid "After enabling the units of measure setting, view the default units of measure categories in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Units of Measures --> UoM Categories`. The category is important for unit conversion, Odoo can only convert a product's units from one unit to another only if both units belong to the same category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Set units of measure categories."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:36
msgid "Each units of measure category has a reference unit. The reference unit is highlighted in blue in the :guilabel:`Uom` column of the :guilabel:`Units of Measure Categories` page. Odoo uses the reference unit as a base for any new units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:40
msgid "To create a new unit, first select the correct category. For example, to sell a product in a box of six units, click on the :guilabel:`Unit` category line. Next, click :guilabel:`Edit`. After that, click :guilabel:`Add a line`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` field, title the new unit `Box of 6`. In the :guilabel:`Type` field, select :guilabel:`Bigger than the reference Unit of Measure`. In the :guilabel:`Ratio` field, enter `6.00000` since a box of six is six times bigger than the reference unit (`1.00000`). Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:47
msgid "Click on the :guilabel:`Unit` category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Add a line`. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use for the Egg product. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure for the category which is “Units” here."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Convert products from one unit to another as long as they belong to the same category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:58
msgid "Specify a product's units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:60
msgid "To set units of measure on a product, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products` and click on a product to open its settings. Then, click on :guilabel:`Edit`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:63
msgid "In the :guilabel:`General Information` tab, edit the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` field to specify the unit of measure that the product is sold in. The specified unit will also be the unit used to keep track of the product's inventory and internal transfers. Edit the :guilabel:`Purchase UoM` field to specify the unit of measure that the product is purchased in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:69
msgid "Unit conversion"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:72
msgid "Buy products in the Purchase UoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:74
msgid "When creating a new request for quotation (RFQ) in the Purchase app, Odoo automatically uses the product's specified purchase unit of measure. However, if needed, the :guilabel:`UoM` can be manually edited on the RFQ."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:78
msgid "After the RFQ is confirmed into a purchase order (PO), click on the :guilabel:`Receipt` smart button at the top right corner of the PO. Odoo automatically converts the purchase unit of measure into the product's sales/inventory unit of measure, so the :guilabel:`Demand` column of the delivery receipt shows the converted quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:83
msgid "For example, if the product's purchase UoM is `Box of 6` and its sales/inventory unit of measure is `Units`, the PO shows the quantity in boxes of six, and the delivery receipt shows the quantity in units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:88
msgid "Replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:90
msgid "A request for quotation for a product can also be generated directly from the product form using the :guilabel:`Replenish` button. After clicking :guilabel:`Replenish`, a replenish assistant box pops up. The purchase unit of measure can be manually edited here if needed. Then, click :guilabel:`Confirm` to create the RFQ."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:95
msgid "Next, click the :guilabel:`Units Forecasted` smart button on the product form and scroll down to :menuselection:`Forecasted Inventory --> Requests for quotation`. Click on the RFQ reference number to open the draft RFQ. The purchase UoM can also be edited here if needed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:100
msgid "Sell in a different UoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:102
msgid "When creating a new quotation in the Sales app, Odoo automatically uses the product's specified unit of measure. However, if needed, the :guilabel:`UoM` can be manually edited on the quotation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:105
msgid "After the quotation is sent to the customer and confirmed into a sales order (SO), click on the :guilabel:`Delivery` smart button at the top right corner of the SO. Odoo automatically converts the unit of measure into the product's inventory unit of measure, so the :guilabel:`Demand` column of the delivery shows the converted quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/uom.rst:110
msgid "For example, if the product's UoM on the SO was changed to `Box of 6`, but its inventory unit of measure is `Units`, the SO shows the quantity in boxes of six, and the delivery shows the quantity in units."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3
msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Special Packaging?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6
msgid "Units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8
msgid "Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your supplier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:-1
msgid "Specify unit of measure for handling a product vs. when it's purchased."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16
msgid "Once a product has a :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` and a :guilabel:`Purchase UoM` set on the product form, Odoo can automatically convert the different units in the product's purchase/sales orders and the orders' respective delivery orders/receipts. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the *same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length, etc.)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:21
msgid "For example, a product can have its :guilabel:`Unit of Measure` set to `feet (ft)` and its :guilabel:`Purchase UoM` set to `centimeters (cm)`. When a purchase order (PO) is created for that product, it will list the quantity in centimeters. Then, when the PO is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a receipt and converts the centimeters to feet. The receipt will list the quantity in feet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:28
msgid "Packages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:30
msgid "A package refers to the physical container that holds one or several products from a picking. For example, when a product is ready for delivery, its quantities can be separated into two different packages. In Odoo, the quantity of products in each package can be recorded in the database. Make sure the :guilabel:`Packages` option is enabled in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Operations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:36
msgid "On a delivery order, separate the products into different packages by setting the :guilabel:`Done` quantity to the desired quantity in the first package. Then, click :guilabel:`Put in Pack` to record the first package. Repeat for each package."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:-1
msgid "Separate delivery into different packages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:-1
msgid "Separate delivery package details"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:49
msgid "Packagings"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:51
msgid "Packaging refers to a standard container that holds several unit of a product. For example, cans of soda can be in a 6-pack, 15-pack, or even a pallet for the packaging."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:54
msgid "In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sales/purchase orders and inventory transfers. The main difference between packagings and units of measure is that packagings are defined at the product level while UoMs are generic."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:-1
msgid "Different product packaging examples."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:-1
msgid "Package field on purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:67
msgid "Packaging is also useful during product reception. When scanning the barcode of the packaging, Odoo automatically adds the number of units contained in the packing on the picking."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/products/usage.rst:71
msgid ":doc:`uom`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting.rst:5
msgid "Valuation Methods"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:3
msgid "Integrating additional costs to products (landed costs)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:5
msgid "The landed cost feature in Odoo allows the user to include additional costs (shipment, insurance, customs duties, etc.) into the cost of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:11
msgid "First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Valuation` and activate the :guilabel:`Landed Costs` feature. Odoo also gives the option to set a :guilabel:`Default Journal` in which the landed costs accounting entries will be recorded."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Activate the landed cost feature in Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:20
msgid "Add costs to products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:23
msgid "Receive the vendor bill"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:25
msgid "After a vendor fulfills a purchase order and sends a bill, click :guilabel:`Create Bill` on the purchase order to create a vendor bill in Odoo. If the vendor bill includes landed costs, such as custom duties, tick the box in the :guilabel:`Landed Costs` column on the vendor bill invoice line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Enable Landed Costs option on vendor bill line."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:33
msgid "For charges that are always landed costs, create a landed cost product in Odoo. That way, the landed cost product can be quickly added to the vendor bill as an invoice line instead of manually entering the landed cost information every time a vendor bill comes in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:37
msgid "First, create a new product in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products --> Create`. Next, name the landed cost product. Then, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to :guilabel:`Service`. A landed cost product must always be a service product type. After that, go to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab and check the box next to :guilabel:`Is a Landed Cost`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating the landed cost product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:43
msgid "If this product is always a landed cost, you can also define it on the product and avoid having to tick the box on each vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Option to define a product as a landed cost."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:50
msgid "Once the landed cost is added to the vendor bill (either by checking the :guilabel:`Landed Cost` option on the invoice line or adding a landed cost product to the bill), click the :guilabel:`Create Landed Costs` button at the top of the bill. Odoo automatically creates a landed cost record with the set landed cost pre-filled in the :guilabel:`Additional Costs` product lines. From here, decide which picking the additional costs apply to by clicking :guilabel:`Edit` and selecting the picking reference number from the :guilabel:`Transfers` drop-down menu. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Use a warehouse transfer to cover a landed cost in the accounting journal."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:62
msgid "After setting the picking, click :guilabel:`Compute` on the landed cost record. Then, go to the :guilabel:`Valuation Adjustments` tab to see the impact of the landed costs. Finally, click :guilabel:`Validate` to post the landed cost entry to the accounting journal."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:66
msgid "The user can access the journal entry that has been created by the landed cost by clicking on the :guilabel:`Journal Entry`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:70
msgid "The product that the landed cost is applied to must have a product category set to a :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` or an :abbr:`AVCO (Average Costing)` method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:-1
msgid "Landed cost journal entry"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/integrating_landed_costs.rst:78
msgid "Landed cost records can also be directly created in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Landed Costs`, it is not necessary to create a landed cost record from the vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:3
msgid "Inventory valuation configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:7
msgid "All of a company's stock on-hand contributes to the valuation of its inventory. That value should be reflected in the company's accounting records to accurately show the value of the company and all of its assets."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:11
msgid "By default, Odoo uses a periodic inventory valuation (also known as manual inventory valuation). This method implies that the accounting team posts journal entries based on the physical inventory of the company, and that warehouse employees take the time to count the stock. In Odoo, this method is reflected inside each product category, where the :guilabel:`Costing Method` field will be set to `Standard Price` by default, and the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` field will be set to `Manual`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1
msgid "The Inventory Valuation fields are located on the Product Categories form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:22
msgid "Alternatively, automated inventory valuation is an integrated valuation method that updates the inventory value in real-time by creating journal entries whenever there are stock moves initiated between locations in a company's inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:27
msgid "Automated inventory valuation is a method recommended for expert accountants, given the extra steps involved in journal entry configuration. Even after the initial setup, the method will need to be periodically checked to ensure accuracy, and adjustments may be needed on an ongoing basis depending on the needs and priorities of the business."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:33
msgid "Types of accounting"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:35
msgid "Accounting entries will depend on the accounting mode: *Continental* or *Anglo-Saxon*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:38
msgid "Verify the accounting mode by activating the :ref:`developer-mode` and navigating to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:41
msgid "In *Anglo-Saxon* accounting, the costs of goods sold (COGS) are reported when products are sold or delivered. This means that the cost of a good is only recorded as an expense when a customer is invoiced for a product. *Interim Stock Accounts* are used for the input and output accounts, and are both *Asset Accounts* in the balance sheet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:46
msgid "In *Continental* accounting, the cost of a good is reported as soon as a product is received into stock. Additionally, a single *Expense* account is used for both input and output accounts in the balance sheet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:51
msgid "Costing methods"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:53
msgid "Below are the three costing methods that can be used in Odoo for inventory valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:55
msgid "**Standard Price**: is the default costing method in Odoo. The cost of the product is manually defined on the product form, and this cost is used to compute the valuation. Even if the purchase price on a purchase order differs, the valuation will still use the cost defined on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:59
msgid "**Average Cost (AVCO)**: calculates the valuation of a product based on the average cost of that product, divided by the total number of available stock on-hand. With this costing method, inventory valuation is *dynamic*, and constantly adjusts based on the purchase price of products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:62
msgid "**First In First Out (FIFO)**: tracks the costs of incoming and outgoing items in real-time and uses the real price of the products to change the valuation. The oldest purchase price is used as the cost for the next good sold until an entire lot of that product is sold. When the next inventory lot moves up in the queue, an updated product cost is used based on the valuation of that specific lot. This method is arguably the most accurate inventory valuation method for a variety of reasons, however, it's highly sensitive to input data and human error."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:70
msgid "Changing the costing method greatly impacts inventory valuation. It's highly recommended to consult an accountant first before making any adjustments here."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:74
msgid "Configure automated inventory valuation in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:76
msgid "Make changes to inventory valuation options by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories`, and choose the category/categories where the automated valuation method should apply."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:81
msgid "It is possible to use different valuation settings for different product categories."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:83
msgid "Under the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` heading are two labels: :guilabel:`Costing Method` and :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation`. Pick the desired :guilabel:`Costing Method` using the drop-down menu (e.g. :guilabel:`Standard`, :guilabel:`Average Cost (AVCO)`, or :guilabel:`First In First Out (FIFO)`) and switch the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` to :guilabel:`Automated`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:89
msgid ":doc:`Using the inventory valuation </applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:93
msgid "When choosing :guilabel:`Average Cost (AVCO)` as the :guilabel:`Costing Method`, the numerical value in the :guilabel:`Cost` field for products in the respective product category will no longer be editable, and will appear grayed out. The :guilabel:`Cost` amount will instead automatically update based on the average purchase price both of inventory on hand and the costs accumulated from validated purchase orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:99
msgid "On the same screen, the :guilabel:`Account Stock Properties` fields will appear, as they are now required fields given the change to automated inventory valuation. These accounts are defined as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:103
msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account`: when automated inventory valuation is enabled on a product, this account will hold the current value of the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:105
msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Input Account`: counterpart journal items for all incoming stock moves will be posted in this account, unless there is a specific valuation account set on the source location. This is the default value for all products in a given category, and can also be set directly on each product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:109
msgid ":guilabel:`Stock Output Account`: counterpart journal items for all outgoing stock moves will be posted in this account, unless there is a specific valuation account set on the destination location. This is the default value for all products in a given category, and can also be set directly on each product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:115
msgid "Access reporting data generated by inventory valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:117
msgid "To start, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Reporting --> Balance Sheet`. At the top of the dashboard, change the :guilabel:`As of` field value to :guilabel:`Today`, and adjust the filtering :guilabel:`Options` to :guilabel:`Unfold All` in order to see all of the latest data displayed, all at once."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:122
msgid "Under the parent :guilabel:`Current Assets` line item, look for the nested :guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account` line item, where the total valuation of all of the inventory on hand is displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:126
msgid "Access more specific information with the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation Account` drop-down menu, by selecting either the :guilabel:`General Ledger` to see an itemized view of all of the journal entries, or by selecting :guilabel:`Journal Items` to review all of the individualized journal entries that were submitted to the account. As well, annotations to the :guilabel:`Balance Sheet` can be added by choosing :guilabel:`Annotate`, filling in the text box, and clicking :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/inventory_valuation_config.rst:-1
msgid "See the full inventory valuation breakdown in Odoo Accounting app."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:3
msgid "Using inventory valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:5
msgid "*Inventory valuation* is a quintessential accounting procedure that calculates the value of on-hand stock. Once determined, the inventory valuation amount is then incorporated into a company's overall value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:9
msgid "In Odoo, this process can be conducted manually— by warehouse employees physically counting the products— or automatically through the database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:13
msgid ":ref:`Inventory valuation configuration <inventory/inventory_valuation_config>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:16
msgid "Understand the basics of inventory valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:18
msgid "In order to understand how moving products in and out of stock affects the company's overall value, consider the following product and stock moves scenario below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:22
msgid "Receive a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:24
msgid "For example, consider an physical product, a simple *table*, which is categorized as `Office Furniture` in the product form's :guilabel:`Product Category` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:27
msgid "Navigate to the the product category itself by going to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Configuration --> Product Categories`, and on the form, set the :guilabel:`Costing Method` as `First In First Out (FIFO)` and the :guilabel:`Inventory Valuation` field as `Automated`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:32
msgid "Alternatively access the :guilabel:`Product Categories` dashboard by clicking on the :guilabel:`internal link` arrow on the individual product's form, by hovering over the :guilabel:`Product Category` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:36
msgid "Next, assume 10 tables are purchased at a price of $10.00, each. The :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)` for those tables will show the subtotal of the purchase as $100, plus any additional costs or taxes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Purchase order with 10 tables products valued at $10 each."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:43
msgid "After selecting :guilabel:`Validate` on the :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`, use the :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button to view how the value of inventory was impacted."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Valuation smart button on a receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:51
msgid ":ref:`Developer mode <developer-mode>` must be turned on to see the *Valuation* smart button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:54
msgid "The :doc:`consignment </applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/misc/owned_stock>` feature allows ownership to items in stock. Thus, products owned by other companies are not accounted for in the host company's inventory valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:58
msgid "The :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` dashboard then displays valuation of all products in the shipment, along with their quantities and valuation. In the example of 10 tables being purchased, the :guilabel:`Total Value` column of the dashboard would display a calculated valuation of $100."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Stock valuation page depicting the products within a shipment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:66
msgid "In Odoo, automatic inventory valuation records are also recorded in the *Accounting* app. To access these accounting entries, navigate to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Journal Entries`, and look for inventory valuation entries with the `STJ` prefix in the :guilabel:`Journal` and :guilabel:`Number` columns, respectively."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Accounting entry for the inventory valuation of 10 tables."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:76
msgid "Deliver a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:78
msgid "In the same logic, when a table is shipped to a customer and leaves the warehouse, the stock valuation decreases. The :guilabel:`Valuation` smart button on the :abbr:`DO (Delivery Order)`, likewise, displays the stock valuation record as it does on a :abbr:`PO (Purchase Order)`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Decreased stock valuation after a product is shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:87
msgid "The inventory valuation report"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:89
msgid "To view the current value of all products in the warehouse, go to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Inventory Valuation`. The records in the table are organized by product, and selecting a product's drop-down menu displays detailed records with the :guilabel:`Date`, :guilabel:`Quantity`, and :guilabel:`Total Value` of the inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Inventory valuation report showing multiple products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:99
msgid "The :guilabel:`Inventory At Date` button, located in the top-left corner of the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` dashboard, shows the inventory valuation of products available during a prior specified date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:104
msgid "Update product unit price"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:106
msgid "For any company: lead times, supply chain failures, and other risk factors can contribute to invisible costs. Although Odoo attempts to accurately represent the stock value, *manual valuation* serves as an additional tool to update the unit price of products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:111
msgid "Manual valuation is intended for products that can be purchased and received for a cost greater than 0, or have product categories set with :guilabel:`Costing Method` set as either `Average Cost (AVCO)` or `First In First Out (FIFO)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Add manual valuation of stock value to a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:119
msgid "Create manual valuation entries on the :guilabel:`Stock Valuation` dashboard by first navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory app --> Reporting --> Inventory Valuation`, and then click the little gray drop-down icon to the left of a product's name, to then reveal stock valuation line items below as well as a teal :guilabel:`+ (plus)` button on the right."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:124
msgid "Click the teal :guilabel:`+ (plus)` button to open up the :guilabel:`Product Revaluation` form, where updates to the calculation of inventory valuation can be made, by increasing or decreasing the unit price of each product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/reporting/using_inventory_valuation.rst:-1
msgid "Product revaluation form adding a value of $1.00 with the reason being inflation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses.rst:5
msgid "Warehouses"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:3
msgid "Resupply from another warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:5
msgid "A common use case for multiple warehouses is to have one central warehouse that resupplies multiple shops, and in this case, each shop is considered a local warehouse. When a shop wants to replenish a product, the product is ordered to the central warehouse. Odoo allows the user to easily set which warehouse(s) can resupply another warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:13
msgid "To resupply from another warehouse, first go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Warehouse` and activate :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Enable Multi-Step Routes in Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:21
msgid "View all the configured warehouses by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:24
msgid "Create a new warehouse by clicking :guilabel:`Create`. Then, give the warehouse a name and a :guilabel:`Short Name`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:27
msgid "After that, go back to the :guilabel:`Warehouses` page and open the warehouse that will be resupplied by the second warehouse. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit`. In the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, locate the :guilabel:`Resupply From` field, and check the box next to the second warehouse's name. If the warehouse can be resupplied by more than one warehouse, make sure to check those warehouses' boxes too. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting. Now, Odoo knows which warehouses can resupply this warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Supply one warehouse with another in the Warehouse Configuration tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:39
msgid "Set route on a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:41
msgid "After configuring which warehouse(s) to resupply from, a new route is now available on all product forms. The new route appears as :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab on a product form. Use the :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` route with a reordering rule or the make to order (MTO) route to replenish stock by moving the product from one warehouse to another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "Route setting which enables a product to resupplied from a second warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:51
msgid "When a product's reordering rule is triggered and the product has the :guilabel:`Supply Product from [Warehouse Name]` route set, Odoo automatically creates two pickings. One picking is a *delivery order* from the second warehouse, which contains all the necessary products, and the second picking is a *receipt* with the same products for the main warehouse. The product move from the second warehouse to the main warehouse is fully tracked in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:57
msgid "On the picking/transfer records created by Odoo, the :guilabel:`Source Document` is the product's reordering rule. The location between the delivery order and the receipt is a transit location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "A reordering rule automatically creates two receipts for stock between warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "A warehouse order for resupplying one warehouse's stock with another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/resupply_warehouses.rst:-1
msgid "A receipt for stock received to one warehouse from another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:3
msgid "Transfer products between warehouses using replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:5
msgid "For companies that use multiple warehouses, it is often necessary to transfer items between them. This is referred to as an *inter-warehouse transfer*. Odoo *Inventory* handles the administrative process of inter-warehouse transfers to ensure that inventory counts remain accurate during and after the transfer. This document will detail the method for conducting an inter-warehouse transfer using replenishment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:12
msgid "Configure warehouses for inter-warehouse replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:14
msgid "First, ensure the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` setting is enabled by navigating to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and then check the box under the :guilabel:`Warehouse` tab. This will provide additional configuration options when creating a second warehouse that are needed for inter-warehouse replenishment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:19
msgid "By default, Odoo comes with a main warehouse already configured. If an additional warehouse has not already been created, do so now from the :guilabel:`Inventory` module by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses --> Create`. Otherwise, select the warehouse that products will be transferred to from the :guilabel:`Warehouses` page and then click :guilabel:`Edit` to change its settings. Configure the warehouse as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:25
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: choose a name that is not already being used for another warehouse (e.g. `Alternative Warehouse`)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:27
msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name`: choose a short name by which the warehouse will be identified (e.g. `ALT_WH`)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:30
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Save` and the new warehouse will be created. In addition, a new :guilabel:`Resupply From` field will appear on the warehouse's form. Click :guilabel:`Edit` and then check the box next to the warehouse that will be used to resupply the warehouse that is currently being configured."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "A warehouse settings form configured to allow resupplying between warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:39
msgid "For the purposes of this demonstration, the warehouse that products are transferred from (outgoing) will be titled \"San Francisco\", and the warehouse that products are transferred to (incoming) will be titled \"San Francisco 2\"."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:44
msgid "Configure products for inter-warehouse replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:46
msgid "Products must also be configured properly in order for them to be transferred between warehouses. Navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products` and select an existing product or :guilabel:`Create` a new one, if necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:50
msgid "Then, on the product form, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and enable the checkbox for :guilabel:`X: Supply Product from Y`, with *X* being the warehouse receiving the transferred products and *Y* being the warehouse that products are transferred from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the checkbox to resupply one warehouse from another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:59
msgid "Replenish one warehouse from another"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:61
msgid "Starting in the :menuselection:`Inventory` module, select :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and then choose the product that will be replenished. Click the :guilabel:`Replenish` button on the top left of the product page and fill out the pop-up form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`Quantity`: the number of units that will be sent to the warehouse being replenished"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`Scheduled Date`: the date that the replenishment is scheduled to take place"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:67
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: the warehouse that will be replenished"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`Preferred Routes`: select `X: Supply Product from Y`, with *X* being the warehouse to be replenished and *Y* being the warehouse that the product will be transferred from"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "The form for replenishing a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:75
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Confirm` and a delivery order will be created for the outgoing warehouse along with a receipt for the warehouse that will receive the product. Depending on the configuration settings for the outgoing and incoming warehouses, processing delivery orders and receipts will require between one and three steps. This document will detail how to process one-step deliveries and receipts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:82
msgid "Process the delivery order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:84
msgid "The first stage of a replenishment order is processing the delivery from the warehouse that the product is being transferred from. On the :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard, select the :guilabel:`X to Process` button on the :guilabel:`Delivery Orders` card for the outgoing warehouse, then the delivery order created for the replenishment. On the delivery order page, click the :guilabel:`Check Availability` button in the top left to reserve the quantity of the product to be transferred. Once the delivery has been dispatched, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button to register the quantities shipped."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "The delivery orders card for the outgoing warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:97
msgid "Process the receipt"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:99
msgid "Once the goods arrive at the incoming warehouse, the receipt created for that warehouse must be processed as well. Return to the :menuselection:`Inventory` dashboard and select the :guilabel:`X to Process` button on the :guilabel:`Receipts` card for the incoming warehouse, then the receipt created for the replenishment. On the receipt page, click the :guilabel:`Validate` button in the top left of the page to register the quantities received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:109
msgid "After processing the receipt, the products transferred will now appear in the inventory of the incoming warehouse. The stock numbers for both warehouses can be viewed by returning to the product page and selecting the :guilabel:`X Units On Hand` button at the top of the screen."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:114
msgid "Automate inter-warehouse replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:116
msgid "Using reordering rules, it is possible to automate the process of replenishing one warehouse from another."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:119
msgid "To get started, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products`, and then choose the product that will be replenished. From the product page, select the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` smart button at the top of the form, and then on the next page, click :guilabel:`Create` to configure the form as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:124
msgid ":guilabel:`Location`: the location that the reordering rule will replenish when triggered, in this case, the incoming warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:126
msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity`: when the quantity on hand at the incoming warehouse falls below this number, the reordering rule will be triggered"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:128
msgid ":guilabel:`Max Quantity`: when the reordering rule is triggered, the product will be replenished at the incoming warehouse up to this quantity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:130
msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity`: specify if the product should be replenished in batches of a certain quantity; for example, a product could be replenished in batches of 20"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:132
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM`: the unit of measure used for reordering the product; this value can simply be `Units`, or a specific unit of measurement for weight, length, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:-1
msgid "A fully configured reordering rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:139
msgid "Finish by clicking :guilabel:`Save` and the reordering rule will be created. Now, when the scheduler runs automatically each day, a transfer will be created for each reordering rule that has been triggered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:144
msgid "To manually trigger reordering rules, start from the :menuselection:`Inventory` module and select :menuselection:`Operation --> Run Scheduler`, then click the green :guilabel:`Run Scheduler` button in the pop-up that appears."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_replenishment_transfer.rst:148
msgid "After the scheduler runs, a delivery order and receipt will be created for the outgoing and incoming warehouses, respectively. Both the delivery order and receipt should be processed using the same method as detailed above."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:3
msgid "Manage Warehouses and Locations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:9
msgid "Warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:11
msgid "In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which a company's items are stocked. Multiple warehouses can be set up in Odoo and the user can create moves between warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:15
msgid "Location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:17
msgid "A **Location** is a specific space within the warehouse. It can be a sublocation of the warehouse (a shelf, a floor, an aisle, and so on). Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. In Odoo, as many locations can be configured as needed under one warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:22
msgid "There are three types of locations:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:24
msgid "The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the warehouses that the company owns. They can be the loading and unloading areas of the warehouse, a shelf, a department, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:28
msgid "The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's warehouse. They work the same way as physical locations, with the only difference being that they are not owned by the user's company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:32
msgid "The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or anymore). They come in handy when recording lost products (**Inventory Loss**), or accounting for products that are on their way to the warehouse (**Procurements**)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:37
msgid "In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. Locations can be structured as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives more detailed levels of analysis of the stock operations and the organization of the warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:44
msgid "To activate locations, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and enable :guilabel:`Storage Locations`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the storage location feature in Odoo Inventory settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:52
msgid "To manage several routes within the warehouses, also enable :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` and check :doc:`../../routes/concepts/use_routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:56
msgid "Create a new warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:58
msgid "To create a warehouse, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Warehouses` and click on :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:61
msgid "Then, fill out a :guilabel:`Warehouse Name` and a :guilabel:`Short Name`. The short name is five characters maximum."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Short name field of a warehouse on Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:69
msgid "The :guilabel:`Short Name` appears on transfer orders and other warehouse documents. Odoo recommends using an understandable one like \"WH/[first letters of location]\"."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:72
msgid "Now, go back to the :guilabel:`Inventory` dashboard. There, new operations related to the newly created warehouse have been automatically generated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Inventory app dashboard displaying new transfer types for the recently created warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:80
msgid "Adding a second warehouse will automatically activate the :guilabel:`Locations` setting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:83
msgid "Create a new location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:85
msgid "To create a location, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Locations` and click on :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:88
msgid "Then, fill out a :guilabel:`Location Name` and a :guilabel:`Parent Location` and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/management/warehouses/warehouses_locations.rst:-1
msgid "Create a new warehouse location in Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes.rst:5
msgid "Advanced Routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts.rst:5
msgid "Concepts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3
msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5
msgid "Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load another truck."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:13
msgid "For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What is cross-docking and is it for me? <https://www.odoo.com/blog/business-hacks-1/post/what-is-cross-docking-and-is-it-for-me-270>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:20
msgid "In the *Inventory* app, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the *Multi-Step Routes*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:27
msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:29
msgid "Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit your warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36
msgid "This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that can be found in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:43
msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:45
msgid "Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price for it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:55
msgid "Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* because we still need to order the product to our supplier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68
msgid "Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the products in the *Input Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:77
msgid "When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to *Output*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:86
msgid "The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3
msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5
msgid "When you plan to deliver a customer, you don't know in advance if the products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set those virtual warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:11
msgid "Set up virtual warehouses"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:13
msgid "Let's say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on create."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:22
msgid "The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, because you will need it later in the process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:25
msgid "Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse A+B."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:34
msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:36
msgid "Let's say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping information."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:41
msgid "You might find it handy to set the Warehouse A+B as the default warehouse for each sales person. This way each sale will use the Warehouse A+B as the default warehouse option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:47
msgid "Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse A and one in warehouse B."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3
msgid "Routes and Pull/Push Rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:5
msgid "In inventory management, the supply chain strategy determines when products should be purchased/manufactured, delivered to distribution centers, and made available to the retail channel."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:9
msgid "In Odoo, a product's supply chain strategy can be configured using *Routes*, which feature *Pull and Push Rules*. Once everything is properly configured, the Inventory app can automatically generate transfers following the configured push/pull rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:14
msgid "Inside the warehouse"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:16
msgid "In a generic warehouse, there are receiving docks, a quality control area, storage locations, picking and packing areas, and shipping docks. All products go through all these locations. As the products move through the locations, each location triggers the products' specified route and rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a generic warehouse with stock and quality control area."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:25
msgid "In this example, vendor trucks unload pallets of ordered products at the receiving docks. Operators then scan the products in the receiving area. Depending on the product's route and rules, some of these products are sent to a quality control area (for example, products that are components used in the manufacturing process), while others are directly stored in their respective locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a generic push to rule when receiving products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:34
msgid "Here is an example of a fulfillment route. In the morning, items are picked for all the orders that need to be prepared during the day. These items are picked from storage locations and moved to the picking area, close to where the orders are packed. Then, the orders are packed in their respective boxes and conveyors bring them close to the shipping docks, ready to be delivered to customers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a generic pull from rule when preparing deliveries."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:45
msgid "Pull rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:47
msgid "With *Pull Rules*, a demand for some products triggers procurements, while *Push Rules* are triggered by products arriving in a specific location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:50
msgid "Pull Rules are used to fulfill a sales order. Odoo generates a need at the *Customer Location* for each product in the order. Because pull rules are triggered by a need, Odoo looks for a pull rule defined on the *Customer Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:54
msgid "In this case, a \"delivery order\" pull rule that transfers products from the *Shipping Area* to the *Customer Location* is found, and a transfer between the two locations is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:57
msgid "Then, Odoo finds another pull rule that tries to fulfill the need for the *Shipping Area*: the \"packing\" rule that transfers products from the *Packing Area* to the *Shipping Area*. Finally, other pull rules are triggered until a transfer between the *Stock* and the *Picking Area* is created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:63
msgid "All these product transfers are automatically generated by Odoo based on the pull rules, starting from the end (the customer location) and going backward (the stock warehouse). While working, the operator processes these transfers in the opposite order: first the picking, then the packing, and finally the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:69
msgid "Push rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:71
msgid "On the other hand, *Push Rules* are much easier to understand. Instead of generating documents based on needs, they are triggered in real time when products arrive in a specific location. Push rules basically say: \"when a product arrives at a specific location, move it to another location.\""
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:75
msgid "An example of a push rule would be: when a product arrives in the *Receipt Area*, move it to the *Storage Location*. As different push rules can be applied to different products, the user can assign different storage locations for different products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:79
msgid "Another push rule could be: when products arrive at a location, move them to the *Quality Control Area*. Then, once the quality check is done, move them to their *Storage Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:83
msgid "Push rules can only be triggered if there are no pull rules that have already generated the product transfers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:87
msgid "Sets of push/pull rules like those are called *Routes*. The grouping on the rule decides if products are grouped in the same transfer or not. For example, during the picking operation, all orders and their products are grouped in one transfer, whereas the packing operation respects the grouping per customer order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:95
msgid "Use routes and rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:97
msgid "Since *Routes* are a collection of *Push and Pull Rules*, Odoo helps you manage advanced route configurations such as:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:100
msgid "Manage product manufacturing chains."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:101
msgid "Manage default locations per product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:102
msgid "Define routes within the stock warehouse according to business needs, such as quality control, after-sales services, or supplier returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:104
msgid "Help rental management by generating automated return moves for rented products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:106
msgid "To configure a route for a product, first, open the :guilabel:`Inventory` application and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Then, in the :guilabel:`Warehouse` section, enable the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature and click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "Activate the Multi-Step Routes feature in Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:115
msgid "The :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is automatically activated with the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:118
msgid "Once this first step is completed, the user can use pre-configured routes that come with Odoo, or they can create custom routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:122
msgid "Pre-configured routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:124
msgid "To access Odoo's pre-configured routes, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouses`. Then, open a warehouse form. In the :guilabel:`Warehouse Configuration` tab, the user can view the warehouse's pre-configured routes for :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` and :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "A preconfigured warehouse in Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:133
msgid "Some more advanced routes, such as pick-pack-ship, are also available. The user can select the route that best fits their business needs. Once the :guilabel:`Incoming Shipments` and :guilabel:`Outgoing Shipments` routes are set, head to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes` to see the specific routes that Odoo generated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of all the preconfigured routes Odoo offers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:142
msgid "On the :guilabel:`Routes` page, click on a route to open the route form. In the route form, the user can view which places the route is :guilabel:`Applicable On`. The user can also set the route to only apply on a specific :guilabel:`Company`. This is useful for multi-company environments; for example, a user can have a company and warehouse in Country A and a second company and warehouse in Country B."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a route example applicable on product categories and warehouses."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:152
msgid "At the bottom of the route form, the user can view the specific :guilabel:`Rules` for the route. Each :guilabel:`Rule` has an :guilabel:`Action`, a :guilabel:`Source Location`, and a :guilabel:`Destination Location`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "An example of rules with push & pull actions in Odoo Inventory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:161
msgid "Custom Routes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:163
msgid "To create a custom route, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes`, and click on :guilabel:`Create`. Next, choose the places where this route can be selected. A route can be applicable on a combination of places."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a pick-pack-ship route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:171
msgid "Each place has a different behavior, so it is important to tick only the useful ones and adapt each route accordingly. Then, configure the :guilabel:`Rules` of the route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:174
msgid "If the route is applicable on a product category, the route still needs to be manually set on the product category form by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories`. Then, select the product category and open the form. Next, click :guilabel:`Edit` and under the :guilabel:`Logistics` section, set the :guilabel:`Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:179
msgid "When applying the route on a product category, all the rules configured in the route are applied to **every** product in the category. This can be helpful if the business uses the dropshipping process for all the products from the same category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a route applied to the \"all\" product category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:187
msgid "The same behavior applies to the warehouses. If the route can apply to :guilabel:`Warehouses`, all the transfers occurring inside the chosen warehouse that meet the conditions of the route's rules will then follow that route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the warehouse drop-down menu when selecting applicable on warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:195
msgid "If the route is applicable on :guilabel:`Sales Order Lines`, it is more or less the opposite. The route must be manually chosen when creating a quotation. This is useful if some products go through different routes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:199
msgid "Remember to toggle the visibility of the :guilabel:`Route` column on the quotation/sales order. Then, the route can be chosen on each line of the quotation/sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the menu allowing to add new lines to sales orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:206
msgid "Finally, there are routes that can be applied to products. Those work more or less like the product categories: once selected, the route must be manually set on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:209
msgid "To set a route on a product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Products` and select the desired product. Then, go to the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab and under the :guilabel:`Operations` section, select the :guilabel:`Routes`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of a product form, where the route must be selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:218
msgid "Rules must be set on the route in order for the route to work."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:221
msgid "Rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:223
msgid "The rules are defined on the route form. First, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Routes` and open the desired route form. Next, click :guilabel:`Edit` and in the :guilabel:`Rules` section, click on :guilabel:`Add a line`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the rules menu, where it is possible to add new rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:231
msgid "The available rules trigger various actions. If Odoo offers *Push* and *Pull* rules, others are also available. Each rule has an :guilabel:`Action`:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:234
msgid ":guilabel:`Pull From`: this rule is triggered by a need for the product in a specific location. The need can come from a sales order being validated or from a manufacturing order requiring a specific component. When the need appears in the destination location, Odoo generates a picking to fulfill this need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:238
msgid ":guilabel:`Push To`: this rule is triggered by the arrival of some products in the defined source location. In the case of the user moving products to the source location, Odoo generates a picking to move those products to the destination location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:241
msgid ":guilabel:`Pull & Push`: this rule allows the generation of pickings in the two situations explained above. This means that when products are required at a specific location, a transfer is created from the previous location to fulfill that need. This creates a need in the previous location and a rule is triggered to fulfill it. Once the second need is fulfilled, the products are pushed to the destination location and all the needs are fulfilled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:246
msgid ":guilabel:`Buy`: when products are needed at the destination location, a request for quotation is created to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:248
msgid ":guilabel:`Manufacture`: when products are needed in the source location, a manufacturing order is created to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "Overview of a \"Pull From\" rule that creates a transfer between the stock and the packing\n"
"zone."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:256
msgid "The :guilabel:`Operation Type` must also be defined on the rule. This defines which kind of picking is created from the rule."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:259
msgid "If the rule's :guilabel:`Action` is set to :guilabel:`Pull From` or :guilabel:`Pull & Push`, a :guilabel:`Supply Method` must be set. The :guilabel:`Supply Method` defines what happens at the source location:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:263
msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock`: the products are taken from the available stock of the source location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:265
msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: the system tries to find a stock rule to bring the products to the source location. The available stock is ignored."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:267
msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock, if Unavailable, Trigger Another Rule`: the products are taken from the available stock of the source location. If there is no stock available, the system tries to find a rule to bring the products to the source location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:271
msgid "In the *Scheduling* section, you can determine how Odoo behaves when one of the chain's pickings is rescheduled. In case you decide to **Propagate Rescheduling**, the next move is also to be rescheduled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:275
msgid "If you prefer having the choice to reschedule the next move, you can decide to receive an alert in the form of a *next activity*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:279
msgid "Sample full route flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:281
msgid "In this example, let's use a custom *Pick - Pack - Ship* route to try a full flow with an advanced custom route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:284
msgid "First, a quick look at the route's rules and their supply methods. There are three rules, all :guilabel:`Pull From` rules. The :guilabel:`Supply Methods` for each rule are the following:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:287
msgid ":guilabel:`Take From Stock`: When products are needed in the :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone`, *picks* (internal transfers from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone`) are created from :guilabel:`WH/Stock` to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:290
msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: When products are needed in :guilabel:`WH/Output`, *packs* (internal transfers from :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` to :guilabel:`WH/Output`) are created from :guilabel:`WH/Packing Zone` to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:293
msgid ":guilabel:`Trigger Another Rule`: When products are needed in :guilabel:`Partner Locations/Customers`, *delivery orders* are created from :guilabel:`WH/Output` to fulfill the need."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "Overview of all the transfers created by the pick - pack - ship route."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:301
msgid "This means that, when a customer orders products that have a *pick - pack - ship* route set on it, a delivery order is created to fulfill the order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the operations created by a pull from transfer."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:309
msgid "If the source document for multiple tranfers is the same sales order, the status is not the same. The status will be :guilabel:`Waiting Another Operation` if the previous transfer in the list is not done yet."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the transfers' various statuses at the beginning of the process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:317
msgid "To prepare the delivery order, packed products are needed at the output area, so an internal transfer is requested from the packing zone."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the detailed operations for a transfer between the packing and output zones."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:324
msgid "Obviously, the packing zone needs products ready to be packed. So, an internal transfer is requested to the stock and employees can gather the required products from the warehouse."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the detailed operations for a transfer between the stock and packing zones."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:331
msgid "As explained in the introduction of the documentation, the last step in the process (for this route, the delivery order) is the first to be triggered, which then triggers other rules until we reach the first step in the process (here, the internal transfer from the stock to the packing area). Now, everything is ready to be processed so the customer can get the ordered items."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:336
msgid "In this example, the product is delivered to the customer when all the rules have been triggered and the transfers are done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:-1
msgid "View of the transfers' statuses when the route is completed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies.rst:5
msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3
msgid "Putaway rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:6
msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:8
msgid "A good warehouse implementation makes sure that products automatically move to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo uses *Putaway Rules*. Putaway is the process of taking products from the received shipments and putting them into the appropriate location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:13
msgid "If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other because of a potential chemical reaction. That's where putaway rules intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Inventory` app, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes` feature. By doing so, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is also automatically activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:-1
msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes in Inventory configuration settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:29
msgid "Setting up a putaway rule"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:31
msgid "In some cases, like for a retail shop storing fruits and vegetables, products should be stored in different locations depending on several factors like frequency, size, product category, specific environment needs, and so on."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:35
msgid "In this example, suppose there is one warehouse location, **WH/Stock**, with the following sub-locations:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:38
msgid "WH/Stock/Pallets"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:40
msgid "WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:41
msgid "WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL2"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:42
msgid "WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL3"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:44
msgid "WH/Stock/Shelf 1"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:46
msgid "WH/Stock/Shelf 2"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:48
msgid "WH/Stock/Shelf 2/Small Refrigerator"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:50
msgid "WH/Stock/Shelf 3"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:52
msgid "Manage those locations with putaway rules. To create a putaway rule, open the :guilabel:`Inventory` app and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Putaway Rules`. Then, click on :guilabel:`Create` and configure a putaway rule that indicated the main location the product will enter before being redirected to the right storage location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:58
msgid "The putaway rules can be defined either per product/product category and/or package type (the :guilabel:`Packages` setting must be enabled for that). Putaway rules are read sequentially until a match is found."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:62
msgid "Take the following example:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:64
msgid "If water (category All/drinks) is received, whatever the package, it will be redirected to WH/Stock/Shelf 2/Small Refrigerator."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:66
msgid "If orange juice cans, packaged in boxes, are received, they will be redirected to WH/Stock/Shelf 2."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:68
msgid "If water or apple juice bottles, packaged in boxes, are received, they will be redirected to WH/Stock/Shelf 3."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:70
msgid "If a pallet of lemonade cans are receieved, it will be redirected to WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:-1
msgid "Some examples of putaway rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:77
msgid "Using Storage Categories"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:79
msgid "A *Storage Category* is an extra location attribute. Storage categories allow the user to define the quantity of products that can be stored in the location and how the location will be selected with putaway rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:86
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Inventory` app, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate the :guilabel:`Storage Categories` feature. By doing so, the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` feature is also automatically activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:91
msgid "Create a Storage Category"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:93
msgid "To create a storage category, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Storage Categories` and click :guilabel:`Create`. Then, click :guilabel:`Save` and click :guilabel:`Storage Categories` or go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Storage Categories` to create a new storage category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:-1
msgid "Create Storage Categories inside Odoo Inventory configuration settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:102
msgid "First, click :guilabel:`Create` and type a name for the storage category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:104
msgid "Then, there are options to limit the capacity by weight, by product, or by package type. The :guilabel:`Allow New Product` field defines when the location is considered available to store a product:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:108
msgid ":guilabel:`If location is empty`: a product can be added there only if the location is empty."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:109
msgid ":guilabel:`If products are the same`: a product can be added there only if the same product is already there."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:111
msgid ":guilabel:`Allow mixed products`: several different products can be stored in this location at the same time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:114
msgid "Once the storage category settings are saved, the storage category can be linked to a location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:-1
msgid "When a Storage Category is created, it can be linked to a warehouse location."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:121
msgid "Storage categories in putaway rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:123
msgid "To continue the example from above, apply the \"High Frequency Pallets\" on the PAL1 and PAL2 locations and rework the putaway rules as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:126
msgid "Assume one pallet of lemonade cans is received:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:128
msgid "If PAL1 and PAL2 are empty, the pallet will be redirected to WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:129
msgid "If PAL1 is full, the pallet will be redirected to WH/Stock/Pallets/PAL2."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:130
msgid "If PAL1 and 2 are full, the pallet will be redirected to WH/Stock/Pallets."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:-1
msgid "Storage Categories used in a variety of putaway rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3
msgid "What is a Removal Strategy (FIFO, LIFO, FEFO, Closest location)?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:5
msgid "Usually, *Removal Strategies* are defined in picking operations to select the best products, optimize the distance for the worker, for quality control purposes, or to first move products with the closest expiration date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:9
msgid "When a product movement needs to be done, Odoo finds available products that can be assigned to the transfer. The way Odoo assigns these products depends on the *Removal Strategy* defined in the *Product Category* or on the *Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:14
msgid "What happens inside the warehouse?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:16
msgid "Imagine a generic warehouse plan, with receiving docks and areas, storage locations, picking and packing areas, and shipping docks. All products go through all these locations, but some rules, such as removal strategies, can have an effect on which products are taken for the pickings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Empty stock waiting for deliveries at the docks."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:24
msgid "Here, vendor trucks unload pallets of goods at the docks. Then, operators scan the products in the receiving area with the reception date and, if the product has an expiration date, the expiration date. After that, products are stored in their respective locations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Products entering stock via the receiving area."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:32
msgid "Next, several orders for the same product are made, but in this example, the goods weren't received on the same day and they don't have the same expiration date. In that situation, logically, sending those with the closest date first is preferred. Depending on the chosen removal strategy, Odoo generates a transfer with the products that fit the settings the best."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid ":alt: Products being packed at the packing area for delivery, taking expiration dates into\n"
"account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:43
msgid "To pick for delivery, the product's lot/serial number can be found on the transfer form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:46
msgid "How does it work?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:49
msgid "First In, First Out (FIFO)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:51
msgid "When using a *First In, First Out* (FIFO) strategy, a demand for some products triggers a removal rule, which requests a transfer for the lot/serial number that has entered the stock first."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:54
msgid "For example, imagine there are three lots of nails in the warehouse. Those three have the following lot numbers: :guilabel:`00001`, :guilabel:`00002`, :guilabel:`00003`, each with five boxes of nails in it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:58
msgid ":guilabel:`00001` entered the stock on the 23rd of May, :guilabel:`00002` on the 25th of May, and :guilabel:`00003` on the 1st of June. A customer orders six boxes on the 11th of June. With the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` removal strategy selected, a transfer is requested for the five boxes of :guilabel:`00001` and one of the boxes in :guilabel:`00002`, because :guilabel:`00001` entered the stock before the others. The box from :guilabel:`00002` is taken next because it has the oldest reception date after :guilabel:`00001`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:65
msgid "So, for every order of a product with the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` strategy selected, Odoo requests a transfer for the products that have been in the stock for the longest period."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:69
msgid "Last In, First Out (LIFO)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:71
msgid "Similar to :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)`, the *Last In, First Out* (LIFO) strategy moves products based on the date they entered the stock. Here, a demand for some products triggers a removal rule that requests a transfer for the lot/serial number that has entered the stock most recently."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:76
msgid "For example, imagine there are three lots of screws in the warehouse. Those three have the following numbers: :guilabel:`10001`, :guilabel:`10002`, and :guilabel:`10003`, each with 10 boxes of screws in it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:80
msgid ":guilabel:`10001` entered the stock on the 1st of June, :guilabel:`10002` on the 3rd of June, and :guilabel:`10003` on the 6th of June. A customer orders seven boxes on the 8th of June. With the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` removal strategy selected, a transfer is requested for seven boxes of :guilabel:`10003` because that lot is the last one to have entered the stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:85
msgid "Basically, for every order of a product with the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategy used, a transfer for the last lot to have entered the stock is requested."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:89
msgid "The :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategy is banned in many countries and can lead to only having old or obsolete products in the stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:93
msgid "First Expire, First Out (FEFO)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:95
msgid "The *First Expired, First Out* (FEFO) strategy is a bit different from the other two removal strategies. For :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)`, the expiration date is important, not the date the product entered the stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:99
msgid "For example, imagine there are three lots of six-egg boxes (in this specific case, don't forget to use :doc:`units of measure <../../management/products/uom>`). Those three lots have the following numbers: :guilabel:`20001`, :guilabel:`20002`, and :guilabel:`20003`, each with five boxes in it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:103
msgid ":guilabel:`20001` entered the stock on the 1st of July and expires on the 15th of July, :guilabel:`20002` entered on the 2nd and expires on the 14th of July, and :guilabel:`20003` entered on the 4th and expires on the 21st of July. A customer orders six boxes on the 5th of July. With the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy selected, a transfer is requested for the five boxes of :guilabel:`20002` and one from :guilabel:`20001`. The transfer for all the boxes in lot :guilabel:`20002` is because they have the closest expiration date. The transfer also requests one box from :guilabel:`20001` because has the next closest expiration date after lot :guilabel:`20002`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:112
msgid "Basically, for every sales order of a product with the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy, a transfer is requested for the product that has the nearest expiration date from the order date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:117
msgid "Closest Location"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:119
msgid "The *Closest Location* strategy is completely different from the other removal strategies. It is not related to the date of entry in the warehouse, but rather the location of the product. It is commonly used for products that do not deteriorate with time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:123
msgid "The aim is to avoid making the warehouse worker take a long journey to the bottom of the stock when the product is also located at a near location. This method is only available if the :guilabel:`Storage Locations` setting is on. The closest location is actually the one that comes first in the alphabetic order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:129
msgid "Use removal strategies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:131
msgid "To differentiate some units from others, the units need to be tracked, either by *lot* or by *serial number*. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, activate the :guilabel:`Storage Location`, :guilabel:`Multi-Step Routes`, and :guilabel:`Lots & Serial Numbers` settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Features to enable in order to properly use removal strategies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:141
msgid "To work with the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy, also activate the :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:144
msgid "Next, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories` to define the removal strategy on a product category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Force removal strategy set up as first in first out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:152
msgid "FIFO (First In, First Out)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:154
msgid "As explained, a :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` removal strategy implies that products stocked first move out first. Companies should use this method if they are selling products with short demand cycles, such as clothes, and to ensure they are not stuck with outdated styles in stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:158
msgid "In this example, there are three lots of white shirts. The shirts are from the :guilabel:`All/Clothes` category, where *FIFO* is set as the removal strategy. In the stock location (:guilabel:`WH/Stock`), the user can find the three lots available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "View of the white shirt lots inventory valuation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:166
msgid "Lot :guilabel:`000001` contains five shirts, :guilabel:`000002` contains three shirts, and :guilabel:`000003` contains two shirts."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:169
msgid "As seen above, :guilabel:`000001` entered the stock first. Now, create a sales order of six white shirts to check that those products from lot :guilabel:`000001` are the first ones to move out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:172
msgid "On the delivery order linked to the picking, the oldest lot numbers should have been reserved thanks to the :abbr:`FIFO (First In, First Out)` strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Two lots being reserved for a sales order with the FIFO strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:180
msgid "LIFO (Last In, First Out)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:182
msgid "With a *LIFO* strategy, that's quite the opposite. In fact, the products that are received last move out first. :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` is mostly used for products without a shelf life."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:185
msgid "In this example, let's use the white shirts again to test the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategy. First, open the product category via :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and change the removal strategy to :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Last in first out strategy set up as forced removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:193
msgid "Then, create a sales order for four white shirts and check that the reserved products are from lots :guilabel:`000003` and :guilabel:`000002`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Two lots being reserved for sale with the LIFO strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:201
msgid "Don't forget that the :abbr:`LIFO (Last In, First Out)` strategy is banned in many countries!"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:204
msgid "FEFO (First Expired, First Out)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:206
msgid "With the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` removal strategy, the way products are picked is not based on the reception date. In this particular case, they are dispatched according to their expiration date."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:211
msgid "For have more information about expiration dates, please have a look at :doc:`the related doc <../../management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:214
msgid "By activating the :guilabel:`Expiration Dates` feature, it becomes possible to define different expiration dates on the serial/lot numbers that will be used in :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)`. These expiration dates can be set by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Products --> Lots/Serial Numbers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "View of the removal date for 0000001."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:223
msgid "Lots are picked based on their removal date, from earliest to latest. Lots without a removal date defined are picked after lots with removal dates."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:227
msgid "Other dates are for informational and reporting purposes only. If not removed from the stock, lots that are past the expiration dates may still be picked for delivery orders!"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:230
msgid "To use the :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` strategy, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Product Categories` and set :abbr:`FEFO (First Expired, First Out)` in the :guilabel:`Force Removal Strategy` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "View of the FEFO strategy being set up as forced removal strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:238
msgid "For this particular case, the stock has hand cream. There are three lots of them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:241
msgid "**Lot / Serial No**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:241
msgid "**Product**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:241
msgid "**Expiration Date**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:243
msgid "0000001"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:243
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:245
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:247
msgid "Hand Cream"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:243
msgid "09/30/2019"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:245
msgid "0000002"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:245
msgid "11/30/2019"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:247
msgid "0000003"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:247
msgid "10/31/2019"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:250
msgid "When a sales order for 25 units of Hand Cream is created, Odoo automatically reserves the lots with the closest expiration date, :guilabel:`0000001` and :guilabel:`0000003`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:-1
msgid "Two hand cream lots reserved for sell with the FEFO strategy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping.rst:5
msgid "Shipping"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation.rst:5
msgid "Shipping Operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:3
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request to a shipper?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:8
msgid "Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. Odoo will be linked with the transportation company tracking system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:12
msgid "It will allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the destination."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:15
msgid "You can easily cancel the request made to the carrier system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:18
msgid "How to cancel a shipping request?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:20
msgid "If the delivery order is not **Validated**, then the request hasn't been made. You can choose to cancel the delivery or to change the carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:24
msgid "If you have clicked on **Validate**, the request has been made and you should have received the tracking number and the label. You can still cancel the request. Simply click on the **Cancel** button next to the **Carrier Tracking Ref**:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:32
msgid "You will now see that the shipment has been cancelled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:37
msgid "You can now change the carrier if you wish."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:40
msgid "How to send a shipping request after cancelling one?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:42
msgid "After cancelling the shipping request, you can change the carrier you want to use. Confirm it by clicking on the **Send to shipper** button. You will get a new tracking number and a new label."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:50
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:115
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:83
msgid ":doc:`invoicing`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:51
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:116
msgid ":doc:`multipack`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:3
msgid "How to invoice the shipping cost to the customer?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:8
msgid "There are two ways to invoice the shipping costs:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:10
msgid "Agree with the customer over a cost and seal it down in the sale order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:13
msgid "Invoice the real cost of the shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:18
msgid "To configure the price of your delivery methods, go to the **Inventory** app, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery --> Delivery Methods`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:21
msgid "You can manually set a price for the shipping: It can be fixed or based on rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:24
msgid "Or you can use the transportation company computation system. Read the document :doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:28
msgid "How to invoice the shipping costs to the customer?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:31
msgid "Invoice the price set on the sale order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:33
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:55
msgid "On your sale order, choose the carrier that will be used. Click on **Delivery Method** to choose the right one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:39
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:36
msgid "The price is computed when you **save** the sale order or when you click on **Set price**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:42
msgid "To invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, click on **Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery method as a product. It may vary from the real price."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:46
msgid "When you create the invoice, it will take the price set on the sale order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:53
msgid "Invoice the real shipping costs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:61
msgid "The price is computed when you **save** the sale order. Confirm the sale order and proceed to deliver the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:64
msgid "The real shipping cost is computed when the delivery order is validated, you can see the real cost in the chatter of the delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:70
msgid "Go back to the sale order, the real cost is now added to the sale order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:76
msgid "When you create the invoice, it will take the price computed by the carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:83
msgid "If you split the delivery and make several ones, each delivery order will add a line to the sale order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:87
msgid ":doc:`../setup/third_party_shipper`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:88
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:84
msgid ":doc:`labels`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:3
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:85
msgid "How to print shipping labels?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:8
msgid "Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers linked with the transportation company tracking system. It allows you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the destination. And finally, you will be able to print the shipping labels directly from Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:18
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:17
msgid "Install the shipper company connector module"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:20
msgid "In the **Inventory** module, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under **Shipping Connectors**, flag the transportation companies you want to integrate :"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26
msgid "Then click on **Apply**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33
msgid "Configure the delivery method"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:32
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:36
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:35
msgid "To configure your delivery methods, go to the **Inventory** module, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Delivery Methods`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:35
msgid "The delivery methods for the chosen shippers have been automatically created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:41
msgid "In the **Pricing** tab, the name of the provider means that the delivery will be handled and computed by the shipper system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:44
msgid "The configuration of the shipper is split into two columns :"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:46
msgid "The first one is linked to **your account** (develop key, password,...). For more information, please refer to the provider website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:49
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:62
msgid "The second column varies according to the **provider**. You can choose the packaging type, the service type, the weight unit..."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:52
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:65
msgid "Uncheck **Test Mode** when you are done with the testings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:55
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:77
msgid "Company configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:57
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:79
msgid "In order to compute the right price, the provider needs your company information. Be sure your address and phone number are correctly encoded."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:64
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:86
msgid "To check your information, go to the **Settings** application and click on **General Settings**. Click on the first link **Configure your company data**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92
msgid "The shipper companies need the weight of your product, otherwise the price computation cannot be done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:73
msgid "Go the **Sales** module, click on :menuselection:`Sales --> Products`. Open the products you want to ship and set a weight on it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:80
msgid "The weight on the product form is expressed in kilograms. Don't forget to do the conversion if you are used to the imperial measurement system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:87
msgid "The delivery order created from the sale order will take the shipping information from it, but you can change the carrier if you want to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:90
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:135
msgid "If you create a delivery transfer from the inventory module, you can add the third party shipper in the additional info tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:96
msgid "Click on **Validate** to receive the tracking number and **the label(s)**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:98
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:151
msgid "The label to stick on your package is available in the history underneath :"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:104
msgid "Click on it to open the document and print it :"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:110
msgid "If you are doing multi-packages shippings, most of the time, there will be one label per package. Each label will appear in the delivery history."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:3
msgid "How to manage multiple packs for the same delivery order?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:8
msgid "By default, Odoo considers that your delivery is composed of one package. But you can easily ship your deliveries with more than one package. It is fully integrated with the third-party shippers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:15
msgid "To configure the use of packages, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Locate the **Packages** section and tick **Record packages used on packing: pallets, boxes,...**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:23
msgid "Click on **Apply** when you are done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:26
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:107
msgid "Sale process"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:29
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:77
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:110
msgid "Sale order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:34
msgid "Click on a **Delivery Method** to choose the right one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:40
msgid "Multi-packages Delivery"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:42
msgid "The delivery created from the sale order will take the shipping information from it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:48
msgid "From here, you can split your delivery into multiple packages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:50
msgid "Choose the quantity you want to put in the first pack in the **Done** column, then click on the link **Put in Pack**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:56
msgid "It will automatically create a pack with the requested quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:58
msgid "Do the same steps for the other pieces you want to pack in."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:63
msgid "Click on **Validate** when you are done."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:66
msgid "Multi-packages with a 3rd party-shipper"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:68
msgid "Once the delivery order is validated, you will receive the tracking number. The **carrier Tracking ref** field will automatically be filled. Click on the **Tracking** button to check your delivery on the provider website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:76
msgid "The **labels** to stick on your packages are available in the history underneath:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup.rst:5
msgid "Shipping Setup"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:3
msgid "How to setup a delivery method?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:8
msgid "Odoo can handle various delivery methods, but it is not activated by default. Delivery methods can be used for your sale orders, your deliveries but also on your e-commerce."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:12
msgid "Delivery methods allow you to manage the transport company, the price and the destination. You can even integrate Odoo with external shippers to compute the real price and the packagings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:20
msgid "Install the inventory module"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:22
msgid "Delivery methods are handled by the **Delivery costs** module. Go to **Apps** and search for the module. You should remove the **Apps** filter in order to see it :"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:30
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:29
msgid "If you want to integrate delivery methods in your e-commerce, you'll have to install the **eCommerce Delivery** module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:39
msgid "First set a name and a transporter company."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:44
msgid "Then you'll have to set the pricing. It can be fixed or based on rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:46
msgid "If the price is fixed, tick **Fixed price**. You'll just have to define the price. If you want the delivery to be free above a certain amount, tick the option **Free if Order total is more than** and set a price."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:54
msgid "If the price varies according to rules, tick **Based on Rules**. Click on **add an item to a pricing rule**. Choose a condition based on either the weight, the volume, the price or the quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:61
msgid "Finally you can limit the delivery method to a few destinations. The limit can be applied to some countries, states or even zip codes. This feature limits the list of countries on your e-commerce."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:69
msgid "You can integrate Odoo with external shippers in order to compute the real price and packagings, and handle the printing the shipping labels. See :doc:`third_party_shipper`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74
msgid "Delivery process"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82
msgid "You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want to invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, click on **Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery method as a product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:88
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:130
msgid "Delivery"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:90
msgid "You can add or change the delivery method on the delivery itself."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:95
msgid "On the delivery, check the **Carrier Information**. The carrier is the chosen delivery method."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:99
msgid ":doc:`third_party_shipper`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:100
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:158
msgid ":doc:`../operation/invoicing`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:3
msgid "How to get DHL credentials for integration with Odoo?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:5
msgid "In order to use the Odoo DHL API, you will need:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:7
msgid "A DHL.com SiteID"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:9
msgid "A DHL Password"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:11
msgid "A DHL Account Number"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:15
msgid "Getting SiteID and password for countries other than United States (UK and Rest of the world)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:17
msgid "You should contact DHL account manager and request integration for XML Express API. The presales should provide you live credentials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:20
msgid "Getting SiteID and Password for United States"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/dhl_credentials.rst:22
msgid "You need to write to xmlrequests@dhl.com along with your full Account details like account number, region, address, etc. to get API Access."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:3
msgid "Set up Sendcloud shipping services in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:5
msgid "Sendcloud is a shipping service aggregator that facilitates the integration of European shipping carriers with Odoo. Once integrated, users can select shipping carriers on inventory operations in their Odoo database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:10
msgid "`Sendcloud integration documentation <https://support.sendcloud.com/hc/en-us/articles /360059470491-Odoo-integration>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:14
msgid "Setup in Sendcloud"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:17
msgid "Create an account and activate carriers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:19
msgid "To get started, go to `Sendcloud's platform <https://www.sendcloud.com>`_ to configure the account and generate the connector credentials. Log in with the Sendcloud account, or create a new one if needed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:24
msgid "For new account creation, Sendcloud will ask for a :abbr:`VAT (Value-Added Tax Identification)` number or :abbr:`EORI (Economic Operators' Registration and Identification)` number. After completing the account setup, activate (or deactivate) the shipping carriers that will be used in the Odoo database."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:30
msgid "Odoo integration of Sendcloud works on free Sendcloud plans *only* if a bank account is linked, since Sendcloud won't ship for free. To use shipping rules or individual custom carrier contacts, a paid plan of Sendcloud is required."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:37
msgid "Once logged into the Sendcloud account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Shipping --> Addresses`, and fill in the field for :guilabel:`Warehouse address`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Adding addresses in the Sendcloud settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:44
msgid "To allow Sendcloud to process returns as well, a :guilabel:`Return Address` is required. Under the :guilabel:`Miscellaneous section`, there is a field called :guilabel:`Address Name (optional)`. The Odoo warehouse name should be entered here, and the characters should be exactly the same."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid "**SendClould configuration**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Miscellaneous`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Address Name (optional)`: `Warehouse #1`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Brand`: `Default`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid "**Odoo warehouse configuration**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Warehouse`: `Warehouse #1`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Short Name`: `WH`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: `My company (San Francisco)`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Address`: `My Company (San Francisco)`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:61
msgid "Notice how the inputs for the :guilabel:`Warehouse` field, for both the Odoo configuration and the Sendcloud configuration, are the exact same."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:65
msgid "Generate Sendcloud credentials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:67
msgid "In the Sendcloud account, navigate to :menuselection:`Settings --> Integrations` in the menu on the right. Next, search for :guilabel:`Odoo Native`. Then, click on :guilabel:`Connect`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:70
msgid "After clicking on :guilabel:`Connect`, the page redirects to the :guilabel:`Sendcloud API` settings page, where the :guilabel:`Public and Secret Keys` are produced. The next step is to name the :guilabel:`Integration`. The naming convention is as follows: `Odoo CompanyName`, with the user's company name replacing `CompanyName` (e.g. `Odoo StealthyWood`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:75
msgid "Then, check the box next to :guilabel:`Service Points` and select the shipping services for this integration. After saving, the :guilabel:`Public and Secret Keys` are generated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Configuring the Sendcloud integration and receiving the credentials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:83
msgid "Setup in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:86
msgid "Install the Sendcloud shipping module"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:88
msgid "After the Sendcloud account is set up and configured, it's time to configure the Odoo database. To get started, go to Odoo's :guilabel:`Apps` module, search for the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Shipping` integration, and install it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Sendcloud Shipping module in the Odoo Apps module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:97
msgid "Sendcloud shipping connector configuration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:99
msgid "Once installed, activate the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Shipping` module in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. The :guilabel:`Sendcloud Connector` setting is found under the :guilabel:`Shipping Connectors` section."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:103
msgid "After activating the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Connector`, click on the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Shipping Methods` link below the listed connector. Once on the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods` page, click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:108
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Methods` can also be accessed by going to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Delivery --> Shipping Methods`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:111
msgid "Fill out the following fields in the :guilabel:`New Shipping Method` form:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:113
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Method`: type `Sendcloud DPD`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:114
msgid ":guilabel:`Provider`: select :guilabel:`Sendcloud` from the drop-down menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:115
msgid ":guilabel:`Delivery Product`: set the product that was configured for this shipping method or create a new product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:117
msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab, enter the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Public Key`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:118
msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab, enter the :guilabel:`Sendcloud Secret Key`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:119
msgid "Manually :guilabel:`Save` the form by clicking the cloud icon next to the :guilabel:`Shipping Methods / New` breadcrumbs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:122
msgid "After configuring and saving the form, follow these steps to load the shipping products:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:124
msgid "In the :guilabel:`SendCloud Configuration` tab of the :guilabel:`New Shipping Method` form, click on the :guilabel:`Load your SendCloud shipping products` link."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:126
msgid "Select the shipping products the company would like to use for deliveries and returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:127
msgid "Click :guilabel:`Select`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:130
msgid "Sample Sendcloud shipping products configured in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`DELIVERY`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping Product`: `DPD Home 0-31.5kg`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Carrier`: `DPD`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Minimum Weight`: `0.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Maximum Weight`: `31.50`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:138
msgid ":guilabel:`Countries`: `Austria` `Belgium` `Bosnia` `Herzegovina` `Bulgaria` `Croatia` `Czech` `Republic` `Denmark` `Estonia` `Finland` `France` `Germany` `Greece` `Hungary` `Iceland` `Ireland` `Italy` `Latvia` `Liechtenstein` `Lithuania` `Luxembourg` `Monaco` `Netherlands` `Norway` `Poland` `Portugal` `Romania` `Serbia` `Slovakia` `Slovenia` `Spain` `Sweden` `Switzerland`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`RETURN`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Shipping Product`: `DPD Return 0-20kg`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Carrier`: `DPD`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Minimum Weight`: `0.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Maximum Weight`: `20.00`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:0
msgid ":guilabel:`Return Countries`: `Belgium` `Netherlands`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Example of shipping products configured in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:156
msgid "Sendcloud does not provide test keys when a company tests the sending of a package in Odoo. This means if a package is created, the configured Sendcloud account will be charged, unless the associated package is canceled within 24 hours of creation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:160
msgid "Odoo has a built-in layer of protection against unwanted charges when using test environments. Within a test environment, if a shipping method is used to create labels, then those labels are immediately canceled after the creation — this occurs automatically. The test and production environment settings can be toggled back and forth from the :guilabel:`Smart Buttons`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:166
msgid "Generate a label with Sendcloud"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:168
msgid "When creating a quotation in Odoo, add shipping and a :guilabel:`Sendcloud shipping product`. Then, :guilabel:`Validate` the delivery. Shipping label documents are automatically generated in the chatter, which include the following:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:172
msgid ":guilabel:`Shipping label(s)` depending on the number of packages."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:173
msgid ":guilabel:`Return label(s)` if the Sendcloud connector is configured for returns."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:174
msgid ":guilabel:`Customs document(s)` should the destination country require them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:176
msgid "Additionally, the tracking number is now available."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:179
msgid "When return labels are created, Sendcloud will automatically charge the configured Sendcloud account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:183
msgid "FAQ"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:186
msgid "Shipment is too heavy"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:188
msgid "If the shipment is too heavy for the Sendcloud service that is configured, then the weight is split to simulate multiple packages. Products will need to be put in different :guilabel:`Packages` to :guilabel:`Validate` the transfer and generate labels."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:192
msgid ":guilabel:`Rules` can also be set up in Sendcloud to use other shipping methods when the weight is too heavy. However, note that these rules will not apply to the shipping price calculation on the calculation on the sales order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:197
msgid "When using a personal carrier contract"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:199
msgid "When using a personal carrier contract in Sendcloud, if the the price is not accurately reflected when creating a quotation in Odoo, then the pricing information needs to be updated in Sendcloud."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:203
msgid "Measuring volumetric weight"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:205
msgid "Many carriers have several measures for weight. There is the actual weight of the products in the parcel, and there is the *volumetric weight* (:dfn:`Volumetric weight is the volume that a package occupies when in transit. In other words it is the physical size of a package`)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:210
msgid "Check to see if selected carrier(s) already have defined formulas to compute the volumetric weight."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:214
msgid "`Sendcloud: How to calculate & automate parcel volumetric weight <https://support.sendcloud.com/ hc/en-us/articles/360059644051-How-to-calculate-automate-parcel-volumetric-weight>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:219
msgid "Unable to calculate shipping rate"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/sendcloud_shipping.rst:221
msgid "First, verify that product being shipped has a weight that is supported by the selected shipping method. If this is set, then verify that the destination country (from the customer address) is supported by the carrier. The country of origin (warehouse address) should also be supported by the carrier."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:3
msgid "How to integrate a third party shipper?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:8
msgid "Odoo can handle various delivery methods, including third party shippers. Odoo can be linked with the transportation company tracking system. It will allow you to manage the transport company, the real prices and the destination."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:19
msgid "In the inventory module, click on :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under **Shipping Connectors**, flag the transportation companies you want to integrate :"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:38
msgid "The delivery methods for the chosen shippers have been automatically created. Most of the time, there will be **2** delivery methods for the same provider: one for **international** shipping and the other for **domestic** shipping."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:43
msgid "You can create other methods with the same provider with other configuration, for example the **Packaging Type**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:46
msgid "You can change the **Name** of the delivery method. This is the name that will appear on your ecommerce."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:49
msgid "Flag **Shipping enabled** when you are ready to use it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:54
msgid "In the pricing tab, the name of the provider chosen under the **Price computation** means that the pricing will be computed by the shipper system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:57
msgid "The configuration of the shipper is split into two columns:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:59
msgid "The first one is linked to **your account** (developer key, password,...). For more information, please refer to the provider website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:67
msgid "Finally you can limit the delivery method to a few destinations. You can limit it to some countries, states or even zip codes. This feature limits the list of countries on your e-commerce. It is useful for the domestic providers. For example, USPS US only delivers from the United States to the United States."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:95
msgid "Go the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Open the products you want to ship and set a weight on it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:102
msgid "The weight on the product form is expressed in kilograms. Don't forget to make the conversion if you are used to the imperial measurement system."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:115
msgid "You can now choose the carrier on your sale order. Click on **Delivery method** to choose the right one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:118
msgid "The price is computed when you save the sale order or when you click on **Set price**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:121
msgid "If you want to invoice the price of the delivery charge on the sale order, click on **Set price**, it will add a line with the name of the delivery method as a product. It may vary from the real price."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:125
msgid "Otherwise, the real price (computed when the delivery is validated) will automatically be added to the invoice. For more information, please read the document :doc:`../operation/invoicing`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:132
msgid "The delivery created from the sale order will take the shipping information from it. You can change the carrier if you want to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:141
msgid "The weight is computed based on the products weights. The shipping cost will be computed once the transfer is validated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:144
msgid "Click on **Validate** to receive the tracking number. The **Carrier Tracking ref** field will automatically be filled. Click on the **Tracking** button to check your delivery on the provider website."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:159
msgid ":doc:`../operation/labels`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:3
msgid "How to get UPS credentials for integration with Odoo?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:5
msgid "In order to use the Odoo UPS API, you will need:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:7
msgid "A UPS.com user ID and password"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:9
msgid "A UPS account number"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:11
msgid "An Access Key"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:13
msgid "An Access Key is a 16 character alphanumeric code that allows access to the UPS Developer Kit API Development and Production servers."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:17
msgid "Create a UPS Account"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:19
msgid "Note that only customers located in the US can open a UPS account online. If you are located outside the US, you will need to contact UPS Customer Service in order to to open an account."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:23
msgid "You can read additional information about opening a UPS account on the their website, on the page, `How to Open a UPS Account Online <https://www.ups.com/content/us/en/resources/sri/openaccountonline.html?srch_pos=2&srch_phr=open+ups+account>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:27
msgid "If you don't already have a UPS account, you can create one along with your online profile by following these steps:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:30
msgid "1. Access the UPS.com web site at `www.ups.com <http://www.ups.com/>`__, and click the **New User** link at the top of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:34
msgid "2. Click the **Register for MyUPS** button, and follow the prompts to complete the registration process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:37
msgid "If you already have a UPS account, you can add it to your online profile as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:39
msgid "Log in to the `UPS.com website <http://www.ups.com/>`_) using your UPS.com User ID and Password."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:41
msgid "Click the **My UPS** tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:43
msgid "Click the **Account Summary** link."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:45
msgid "4. Click the **Add an Existing UPS Account** link in the **UPS Account Details** section of the page."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:48
msgid "5. In the **Add New Account** screen, enter the **UPS Account Number**, **Account Name**, and **Postal Code** fields. The country defaults to United States.q"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:52
msgid "Click the **Next** button to continue."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:55
msgid "Get an Access Key"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:57
msgid "After you have added your UPS account number to your user profile you can request an Access Key from UPS using the steps below:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:60
msgid "Go to the `UPS Developer Kit web page <https://www.ups.com/upsdeveloperkit?loc=en_US>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:61
msgid "Log into UPS.com with your user ID and password"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:62
msgid "Click on the link **Request an access key**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:63
msgid "Verify your contact information"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:64
msgid "Click the **Request Access Key** button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/inventory/shipping/setup/ups_credentials.rst:66
msgid "The **Access Key** will be provided to you on the web page, and an email with the Access Key will be sent to the email address of the primary contact."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:8
msgid "Manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:10
msgid "**Odoo Manufacturing** helps manufacturers schedule, plan and process manufacturing orders. With the work center control panel, put tablets on the shop floor to control work orders in real-time and allow workers to trigger maintenance operations, feedback loops, quality issues, etc."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:15
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: MRP <https://www.odoo.com/slides/mrp-29>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing.rst:17
msgid ":doc:`IoT Boxes (MES) </applications/productivity/iot>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management.rst:5
msgid "Manufacturing management"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:3
msgid "Alternative Work Centers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:5
msgid "Manufacturing several different products simultaneously at the same work center is a common issue for manufacturing companies. Although in practice, employees can manufacture the goods at another work center instead of waiting for one to be available, it's not always simple to have visibility on which work center is busy and plan resources accordingly in real-time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:10
msgid "With Odoo, you can configure alternative work centers to solve this issue. This automatically checks which work center is busy and which equivalent ones are free, and schedules orders and maintenance accordingly."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:14
msgid "This way, your process becomes more efficient, as work center utilisation is optimised."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:17
msgid "Configure your Work Centers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:19
msgid "First, go to the :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings`. Then, enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` feature and hit :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:-1
msgid "Work order settings ticked in Odoo Manufacturing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:26
msgid "Now, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers` and create two new work centers. Add the second work center as an alternative to the first one and vice versa."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:-1
msgid "Create a secondary work center as an alternate to the first."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:33
msgid "Next, go to :menuselection:`Products --> Bills of Materials`, choose your product, and add these work centers to the operations of your :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:-1
msgid "Add work centers to Bill of Materials operations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:41
msgid "Create your Work Orders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:43
msgid "Now that everything is configured, you can create your *Work Orders*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:45
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Operations --> Manufacturing Orders`, and hit :guilabel:`Create`. There, add your product to your manufacturing order and plan it. You can then retrieve them from the :guilabel:`Work Orders` list view, under :menuselection:`Operations > Work Orders`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:49
msgid "Each new *Work Order*, which will be created before the end of the first one, will be scheduled at the alternative work center you configured, as shown below."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:-1
msgid "Work order creation and scheduling."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:57
msgid "Keep in mind that, if you add time after production to your work center, you may have work orders scheduled for your alternative work center even if the usual one is free."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:3
msgid "Create a bill of materials"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:5
msgid "A *Bill of Materials* (or *BoM* for short) is a document that defines the quantity of each component required to make or deliver a finished product. It can also include various operations and the individual step guidelines needed to complete a production process."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:9
msgid "In Odoo Manufacturing, multiple :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` can be linked to each product, so that even product variants can have their own tailored :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:12
msgid "Correctly setting up a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` helps optimize the manufacturing process and save time."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:16
msgid "Set up a bill of materials (BoM)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:18
msgid "The simplest :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` setup is one without operations or instructions, only components. In this case, the production is solely managed using *Manufacturing Orders*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:21
msgid "To create a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` from the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, go to :menuselection:`Products --> Bills of Materials`. Then, click :guilabel:`Create`. Next, specify the :guilabel:`Product`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:26
msgid "A :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` can also be created directly from the product form, in which case the :guilabel:`Product` field is pre-filled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:29
msgid "For a standard :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, set the :guilabel:`BoM Type` to :guilabel:`Manufacture this Product`. Then, click :guilabel:`Add a Line` to specify the various components that make up the production of the final product and their respective quantities. New components can be created quickly through the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, or can be created beforehand in :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products --> Create`. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save` to finish creating the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Set up a Bill of Materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:41
msgid "Specify a bill of materials (BoM) for a product variant"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:43
msgid ":abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` can also be assigned to specific *Product Variants*, with two setup options available to choose from."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:47
msgid "In order to assign :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` to product variants, the product's variant attributes must already be configured on the product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:50
msgid "The first method is to create one :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` per variant by creating a new :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` and specifying the :guilabel:`Product Variant`. The second method is to create one master :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` that contains all of the components, and specify which variant each component applies to using the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` column."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Product Variants in the Bill of Materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:60
msgid "Set up operations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:62
msgid "Add an :guilabel:`Operation` to a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` to specify instructions for production and register time spent on an operation. To use this feature, first enable the :guilabel:`Work Orders` feature in :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings --> Operations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:67
msgid "Then, when creating a new :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, click on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab and click :guilabel:`Add a line` to add a new operation. In the :guilabel:`Create Operations` box, give the operation a name, specify the :guilabel:`Work Center` and duration settings. Like components, Odoo gives the option to specify a product variant in the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` field so the operation only applies to that variant. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save & Close`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:74
msgid "Each operation is unique, as it is always exclusively linked to one :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`. Operations can be reused when configuring a new :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, with the :guilabel:`Copy Existing Operations` feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:-1
msgid "Copy Existing Operations feature."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:83
msgid "Add by-products to a bill of materials (BoM)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:85
msgid "A *By-Product* is a residual product that is created during production in addition to the main product of a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`. Unlike the primary product, there can be more than one by-product on a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:89
msgid "To add by-products to a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, first enable the :guilabel:`By-Products` feature in :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings --> Operations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:92
msgid "Once the feature is enabled, you can add by-products to a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` by clicking on the :guilabel:`Operations` tab and clicking :guilabel:`Add a line`. Then, name the by-product and indicate the :guilabel:`Quantity` and the :guilabel:`Unit of Measure`. If the :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` has configured operations, specify exactly which operation the by-product is produced from in the :guilabel:`Produced in Operation` field. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:3
msgid "Use kits"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:5
msgid "A *kit* is a set of unassembled components. Kits may be sold as products, but are also useful tools for managing more complex bills of materials (BoMs). To use kits, the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` and :guilabel:`Inventory` applications need to be installed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:10
msgid "Create the kit as a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:12
msgid "To use a kit as a sellable product or simply as a component organization tool, the kit should first be created as a product. To create a kit product, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing or Inventory --> Products --> Products`, and then click :guilabel:`Create`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:16
msgid "Next, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to :guilabel:`Storable Product`: this allows for management of kit inventory. The :guilabel:`Route` designation under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab does not matter, since Odoo uses the routes of the kit's components for replenishment purposes. All other parameters for the kit product may be modified according to preference. Finally, click :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:22
msgid "The kit's components must also be configured as products via :menuselection:`Manufacturing or Inventory --> Products --> Products`. These components require no specific configuration."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:26
msgid "Set up the kit BoM"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:28
msgid "After fully configuring the kit product and its components, create a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` for the kit product. Go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Bills of Materials`, and then click :guilabel:`Create`. Next, set the :guilabel:`Product` field to the previously configured kit product. Then, set the :guilabel:`BoM Type` to :guilabel:`Kit`. Finally, add each component and specify its quantity. Make sure to :guilabel:`Save` the changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Kit selection on the bill of materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:38
msgid "If the kit is solely being used as a sellable product, then only components need to be added under the :guilabel:`Components` tab, and configuring manufacturing operations is not necessary."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:42
msgid "When a kit is sold as a product, it appears as a single line item on the quotation and sales order. However, on delivery orders, each component of the kit is listed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:46
msgid "Use kits to manage complex BoMs"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:48
msgid "Kits are also used to manage *multilevel* :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`. These are products that contain other products as components and therefore require nested :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`. Incorporating pre-configured kits into multilevel :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` allows for cleaner organization of bundled products. Under :guilabel:`Components`, list a kit as a component in a higher-level product's :abbr:`BoM (Bills of Material)` to eliminate the need to add the kit's parts individually. Any :guilabel:`BoM Type` can be used for the higher-level product's :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Kit as a component in a multilevel bill of materials."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:60
msgid "To access a comprehensive overview of the multilevel :abbr:`BoM's (Bill of Material's)` components, click on the :guilabel:`Structure & Cost` smart button. Sublevel :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` can be expanded and viewed from this report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:-1
msgid "Expanded kit in the Structure and Cost report."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:68
msgid "When creating a manufacturing order for a product with a multilevel :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, the kit product automatically expands to show all components. Any operations in the kit's :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` are also added to the list of work orders on the manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:74
msgid "Kits are primarily used to bundle components together for organization or sale. To manage multilevel products that require manufactured subcomponents, refer to :doc:`this documentation <sub_assemblies>` on sub-assemblies."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:3
msgid "Managing BoMs for product variants"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:5
msgid "Odoo allows one bill of materials (BoM) to be used for multiple variants of the same product. Having a consolidated BoM for a product with variants saves time by preventing the need to manage multiple BoMs."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:10
msgid "Activate product variants"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:12
msgid "To activate variants, simply navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Products`, and then enable the :guilabel:`Variants` option. After that, click :guilabel:`Save` to apply the setting. For more information on configuring product variants, refer to :doc:`this page <../../../sales/sales/products_prices/products/variants>`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "Selecting \"Variants\" from Inventory app settings."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:22
msgid "Apply BoM components to product variants"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:24
msgid "Next, create a new BoM or edit an existing one by going to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Bills of Materials`. Then, click :guilabel:`Edit`. The :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` option to assign components to specific product variants on the BoM is available once the :guilabel:`Variants` setting is activated from the :guilabel:`Inventory` application. If the :guilabel:`Apply on Variants` field is not immediately visible, activate it from the additional options menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "\"Apply on Variants\" option on the additional options menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:35
msgid "Each component can be assigned to multiple variants. Components with no variants specified are used in every variant of the product. The same principle applies when configuring operations and by-products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:39
msgid "When defining variant BoMs by component assignment, the :guilabel:`Product Variant` field in the main section of the BoM should be left blank, as shown below. This field is used only when creating a BoM specifically for one product variant."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:-1
msgid "Applying components to multiple variants."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/quality_control.rst:3
msgid "Quality Control"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/quality_control.rst:5
msgid "Whether you want to control the quality of your production, or the production of your subcontractor, before registering the products into your stock, you can rely on Odoo's Quality module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/quality_control.rst:10
msgid "To control the quality of your production, you need to set a *Quality Control Point* on the Manufacturing Operation Type, as shown below. To create it, Go to :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control --> Control Points`, and click **Create**. If the check only applies to specific products, or product categories, you can specify these during the setup as well."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/quality_control.rst:19
msgid "Regarding the reception of subcontracted products, instead of the Manufacturing Operation Type, you need to select the 'Receipts' Operation type. For the rest, the same principles apply."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/quality_control.rst:25
msgid "By doing so, a quality check is automatically created each time a finished product is made and/or received. Note that several Quality Check *Types* can be chosen from the dropdown. Note also that several Quality Check Points can be set up for the same Operation Type."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:3
msgid "Manage semi-finished products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5
msgid "A *semi-finished product*, also known as a *subassembly*, is a manufactured product that is used as a component in another product's bill of materials (BoM). Semi-finished products are used to simplify complex :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)` or to more accurately represent a manufacturing flow. A :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` that contains semi-finished products is referred to as a *multilevel BoM*, where the main *top-level product* and its subassemblies are distinguished."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:12
msgid "Configure semi-finished products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:14
msgid "To set up a multilevel :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, the top-level product and semi-finished products must be configured. Therefore, the first step is to create the semi-finished products and their :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:19
msgid ":doc:`bill_configuration`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:-1
msgid "A bill of materials for a semi-finished product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:26
msgid "Create the top-level bill of materials (BoM)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:28
msgid "After the semi-finished products are fully configured, navigate to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Products`. Then, :guilabel:`Create` the top-level product. Configure the product's specifications as desired, and be sure to :guilabel:`Save`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:32
msgid "Once the top-level product is configured, click the :guilabel:`Bill of Materials` smart button on the product form, then click :guilabel:`Create` to make a :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)` for the top-level product. Then, simply add the semi-finished products to this :abbr:`BoM (Bill of Materials)`, along with any other necessary components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:-1
msgid "A bill of materials for a top-level product, containing a subassembly component."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:42
msgid "Manage production planning"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:44
msgid "There are several methods to manage manufacturing order automation for products with multilevel :abbr:`BoMs (Bills of Materials)`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:48
msgid "Semi-finished products are specifically used to manage manufacturable products with multilevel BoMs. If a BoM is being created simply to organize components or bundle sellable products, using :doc:`Kits <kit_shipping>` is the more appropriate option."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:52
msgid "To automatically trigger manufacturing orders for semi-finished products after confirming a manufacturing order for the main product, there are two options:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:55
msgid "**Option 1 (recommended):** Create *Reordering Rules* for the semi-finished products and set both the minimum and maximum desired stock quantities to `0`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:59
msgid ":doc:`../../purchase/products/reordering`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:61
msgid "**Option 2:** Activate the :guilabel:`Replenish on Order (MTO)` and :guilabel:`Manufacture` routes under the :guilabel:`Inventory` tab of the semi-finished product's product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:64
msgid "Option 1 is more flexible than Option 2 and is therefore recommended. Reordering rules do not directly link demand to replenishment, and therefore allow stocks to be unreserved and redirected to other orders, if necessary. The Replenish on Order (MTO) route creates a unique link between the semi-finished and top-level products, exclusively reserving quantities for the confirmed top-level manufacturing order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:70
msgid "Regardless of the method chosen, semi-finished products must be fully manufactured before manufacturing can begin on the top-level product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:-1
msgid "A manufacturing order for a top-level product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:3
msgid "Subcontract your Manufacturing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:5
msgid "Outsourcing a portion or all of your company’s manufacturing needs is not easy. To make it work correctly, you have to:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:8
msgid "Manage the inventory of raw materials at your subcontractor"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:9
msgid "Ship raw material to your subcontractors, at the right time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:10
msgid "Control incoming goods quality"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:11
msgid "Control subcontractors bills"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:13
msgid "Here is an example of subcontracting the manufacturing of “C”, which is produced out of raw materials “A” and “B”."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:20
msgid "With its MRP subcontracting feature, Odoo helps you handle this flow easily."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:25
msgid "To use the subcontracting feature, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Configuration --> Settings` and tick the box *Subcontracting*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32
msgid "To define if a product must be subcontracted, use a *Bill of Materials (BoM)* of type *Subcontracting*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:35
msgid "To create a new *BoM*, go to :menuselection:`Manufacturing --> Products --> Bill of Materials` and hit create. Then, list the components your subcontractor needs to manufacture the product. For costing purposes, you might want to register all the components, even the ones that are sourced directly from the subcontractor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:41
msgid "Once you have set the *BoM Type* to *Subcontracting*, specify one or several subcontractors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:49
msgid "Basic Subcontracting Flow"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:51
msgid "To let your subcontractor know how many products you need, create and send them purchase orders (PO). To do so, go to the *Purchase* app and create a new purchase order. Be sure to send the PO to a vendor that is defined as a subcontractor on the *BoM* of these products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60
msgid "Once the *PO* is validated (1), a pending receipt is created. When the products are received, validate the receipt (2), with the actual quantity received. As a result, Odoo does the following things for you:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64
msgid "Consumes the respective components at the subcontractor’s location, based on the *BoM* and your input (3);"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:66
msgid "Produces the finished goods at the subcontractor’s location (4);"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:68
msgid "Moves products from that subcontractor’s location to YourCompany via the validated receipt (5)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73
msgid "The *PO* is optional. If you create a receipt manually, with the right subcontractor, Odoo still performs all the moves. This can be useful if the subcontractor does not bill a fixed price per item, but rather the time and materials used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79
msgid "Inventory Valuation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:81
msgid "The cost of the manufactured product “C” is defined as:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:83
msgid "**C = A + B + s**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:85
msgid "With:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:87
msgid "**A**: Cost of raw materials coming from YourCompany;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:90
msgid "**B**: Cost of raw materials sourced directly from the"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:90
msgid "subcontractor;"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:92
msgid "**s**: Cost of the subcontracted service."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:94
msgid "Sending raw materials to your subcontractors (**A**) does not impact the inventory valuation, as the components are still valued as part of your stock. This is managed by making the *Subcontracting Location* an *Internal Location*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:99
msgid "Then, the vendor price set on the product C form has to be what has to be paid to the subcontractor for his parts and service time: **B + s**. The product cost has to be: **A + B + s**, how much the product is valued in the accounting."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:104
msgid "Finally, the subcontractor bill then matches the purchase order, with the proposed price coming from the finished products C."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:108
msgid "If managing the replenishment of raw materials **B** at your subcontractor’s location is not needed, simply include the cost of **B** in the subcontractor’s price **s** and remove the products *B* from the *BoM*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:114
msgid "Traceability"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:116
msgid "In case the received products from the subcontractor contain tracked components, their serial or lot numbers need to be specified during the receipt."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:120
msgid "In that case, on the receipt of the subcontracted product, a *Record Components* button appears. Click on it to open a dialog box and record the serial/lot numbers of the components. If the finished product is also tracked, its serial/lot number can be registered here too."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:129
msgid "For audit purposes, it is possible to check the lot numbers recorded on a receipt by using the icon on the right of the finished products:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:136
msgid "Also note that in case flexible consumption has been selected on the subcontracted BOM for a non-tracked product, the record components option will also appear optionally on each move line, if you want to register more or less component consumption at your subcontracting location, when receiving your final product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:145
msgid "As you can see, the reception of both of these non-tracked products can either be executed by selecting the 'Set Quantities' Option or via the move line hamburger menus."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:149
msgid "Automate Replenishment of Subcontractors"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:151
msgid "There are two ways to automate the supply of raw materials to your subcontractors when purchasing the final product. The chosen method depends on whether or not you want the materials to transit through your warehouse. Both of these methods are described as pull style mechanisms as their trigger is the inital PO to the subcontractor, which creates a need at the subcontracting location, for raw material."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:158
msgid "If you are supplying your subcontractor with raw material from your own warehouse, you must activate the 'Resupply Subcontractor on Order' route as shown below. If this is a component that you buy from a vendor, the buy route should also be activated."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:169
msgid "Now, if you want your vendor to resupply your subcontractor directly, you must choose the 'Dropship Subcontractor on Order' option instead. In order for this option to be active on the product form, you must first activate the dropship option from :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings --> Dropshipping`. Once the PO to the subcontractor is validated, this route will create a dropship RFQ from your vendor to that subcontractor. You then just need to review and validate it."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:182
msgid "Note that the buy route is not selected in this case, as the dropship route is a buy route already."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:185
msgid "Finally, if you want to track the stock of these raw materials at your subcontracting location(s), then you must activate *Multi-locations* in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings --> Storage locations`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:189
msgid "From the location form, you are then able to access the Current Stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:198
msgid "Manual Replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:200
msgid "You can also choose to replenish your subcontractors manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:202
msgid "If you want to send components to your subcontractor at your own convenience, select the 'Resupply Subcontractor' Operation Type from the *Inventory* Module, and create a picking, specifying to which subcontractor you are delivering to."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:210
msgid "Alternatively, you can also manually ask your vendor to resupply your subcontractor by creating a dropship type PO, with your subcontractor set as the delivery address."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:3
msgid "Use the Master Production Schedule"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:5
msgid "The Master Production Schedule (MPS) is a valuable tool to plan your production based on your demand forecast."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:11
msgid "Go to the :menuselection:`Manufacturing app --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the Master Production Schedule feature before hitting save."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:15
msgid "In the MPS settings, you can define the time range of your MPS (month/week/day) and the number of periods you want to display at all times."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:18
msgid "Now, go to :menuselection:`Planning --> Master Production Schedule` and click on *add a product*. You can now define your safety stock target (= the stock you want to have on hand at the end of the period) and the minimum and maximum quantities that must or can be replenished in each period."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:26
msgid "In the MPS view, you can decide which information you would like to display by clicking on *rows*. For instance, the *Actual demand* will show you which quantity of products has already been ordered for the period, or *Available to Promise*, what can still be sold during that same period (what you plan to replenish - what is already sold during the period). You can also decide to hide rows if you like."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:36
msgid "Estimate your demand and launch replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:38
msgid "The next step is to estimate the demand for the chosen period. This is done in the *Forecasted Demand* Row. You can easily, at any time, compare the demand forecast with the actual demand (= confirmed sales). The demand forecast for a finished product will impact the indirect demand for its components."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:46
msgid "Once the forecasted demand has been set, the quantity to replenish for the different periods will automatically be computed. The replenishments you are supposed to launch based on your lead times (vendor lead time or manufacturing lead time) are then displayed in green. You can now launch the replenishment by clicking on the replenish button."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:52
msgid "Depending on the configuration of the product (buy vs. manufacture), requests for quotations or manufacturing orders will be created. You can easily access those by clicking on the *Actual Replenishment* cell."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:59
msgid "In case you manually edit the *Suggested Replenishment* quantity, a small cross will appear on the left hand side of the cell. In case you want to go back to the automatically computed value given by Odoo, simply click the cross."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:65
msgid "Cells color signification"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:67
msgid "The cells, which are part of the *Suggested Replenishment* line, can take different colors depending on the situation:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:70
msgid "**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect demand forecast."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:72
msgid "**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity still matches current data."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:74
msgid "**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity was too high considering current data."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:76
msgid "**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity was too low considering current data."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:78
msgid "The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the stock will be negative during the period in question."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:82
msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:84
msgid "You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new replenishment."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:89
msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:91
msgid "You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you can cancel some RFQ or MO manually."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96
msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:98
msgid "You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on the right of its name."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:3
msgid "Manage work orders using work centers"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:5
msgid "Odoo Manufacturing allows for work orders to be carried out at specific work centers. When a manufacturing order is created for a product, any work orders listed in the :guilabel:`Operations` tab of the product bill of materials (BoM) will be automatically created as well and assigned to the specified work center. Work orders can be managed in the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module by selecting :menuselection:`Operations --> Work Orders`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:11
msgid "In order to use work centers, the :guilabel:`Work Orders` feature must first be enabled. To do so, go to the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, and activate the checkbox next to :guilabel:`Work Orders`. Work centers can then be created and managed by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:17
msgid "Create a work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:19
msgid "Within the :guilabel:`Manufacturing` module, select :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers --> Create`. The work center form can then be filled out as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:22
msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center Name`: give the work center a concise name that describes the type of operations it will be used for"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:24
msgid ":guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters`: specify an alternative work center for operations to be carried out at if the main work center is not available"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:26
msgid ":guilabel:`Code`: assign the work center a reference code"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:27
msgid ":guilabel:`Working Hours`: define the number of hours that the work center can be in use each week"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:28
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: select the company that the work center belongs to"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "An example of a fully configured work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:35
msgid "Set standards for work center productivity"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:37
msgid "The :guilabel:`General Information` tab on the work center form allows for productivity goals to be assigned to a work center:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:40
msgid ":guilabel:`Time Efficiency`: used to calculate the expected duration of a work order at the work center; for example, if a work order normally takes one hour and the efficiency is set to 200%, the work order will take 30 minutes"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:43
msgid ":guilabel:`Capacity`: the number of operations that can be performed at the work center simultaneously"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`OEE Target`: the target for efficiency at the work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:46
msgid ":guilabel:`Time before prod.`: setup time required before work can commence"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:47
msgid ":guilabel:`Time after prod.`: breakdown or cleanup time required after work is finished"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:48
msgid ":guilabel:`Cost per hour`: the cost of operating the work center for one hour"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:49
msgid ":guilabel:`Analytic Account`: the account where the cost of the work center should be recorded"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The general information tab of the work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:56
msgid "Assign equipment to a work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:58
msgid "Using the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab, it is possible for specific pieces of equipment to be assigned to a work center. The following information will be displayed for each piece of equipment added:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:61
msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Name`: the name of the piece of equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:62
msgid ":guilabel:`Technician`: the technician responsible for servicing the equipment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:63
msgid ":guilabel:`Equipment Category`: the category the equipment belongs to"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:64
msgid ":guilabel:`MTBF`: mean time between failures; the average time that the piece of equipment will operate before failing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:66
msgid ":guilabel:`MTTR`: mean time to recovery; the average time it takes for the equipment to become fully operational again"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:68
msgid ":guilabel:`Est. Next Failure`: an estimate of when the next equipment failure will occur"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The equipment tab of the work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:75
msgid ":guilabel:`MTBF`, :guilabel:`MTTR`, and :guilabel:`Est. Next Failure` are all calculated automatically based on past failure data, if any exists."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:79
msgid "Integrate IoT devices"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:81
msgid "The :guilabel:`IoT Triggers` tab enables the integration of :abbr:`IoT (Internet of Things)` devices with a work center:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:84
msgid ":guilabel:`Device`: specifies the IoT device to be triggered"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:85
msgid ":guilabel:`Key`: the security key for the device"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:86
msgid ":guilabel:`Action`: the IoT device action triggered"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The IoT Triggers tab of the work center form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:93
msgid "Use case: configure an alternative work center"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:95
msgid "When a work center is at capacity, it cannot accept any new work orders. Instead of waiting for the work center to become available, it is possible to specify an alternative work center where surplus work orders should be carried out."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:99
msgid "Begin by creating a new work center. Configure the :guilabel:`Equipment` tab so that it has all of the same equipment as the main work center. This will ensure that the same tasks can be carried out at both work centers. Navigate to the main work center and include the new work center in the :guilabel:`Alternative Workcenters` selection field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:104
msgid "Now, create a new manufacturing order that uses the main work center for one of its operations. The main work center will automatically be selected for the operation in the :guilabel:`Work Orders` tab. After confirming the manufacturing order, click the :guilabel:`Plan` button that appears at the top left of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "Click the plan button to automatically select an available work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:113
msgid "If the main work center is at capacity, the work center selected for the operation will be automatically changed to the alternative work center."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:-1
msgid "The alternative work center is automatically selected."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:121
msgid "Monitor work center performance"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:123
msgid "Performance for an individual work center can be viewed by selecting :menuselection:`Configuration --> Work Centers`, and clicking on a work center. A variety of metrics showing work center performance can be viewed at the top right of the form:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:127
msgid ":guilabel:`OEE`: overall effective efficiency, the percentage of time that the work center has been fully productive"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:129
msgid ":guilabel:`Lost`: the amount of time lost due to work stoppages"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:130
msgid ":guilabel:`Load`: the amount of time it will take to complete the current workload"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/management/using_work_centers.rst:131
msgid ":guilabel:`Performance`: the real duration of work time, shown as a percentage of the expected duration"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control.rst:5
msgid "Quality control"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:3
msgid "Create quality alerts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:5
msgid "Configuring quality control points is a great way to ensure that quality checks are performed at routine stages during specific operations. However, quality issues can often appear outside of these scheduled checks. Using Odoo *Quality*, users can create quality alerts for issues that are not detected by automated processes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:11
msgid ":doc:`Add quality control points <quality_control_points>`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:14
msgid "Find and fill out the quality alerts form"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:16
msgid "In some situations, it is necessary to manually create quality alerts within the *Quality* module."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:19
msgid "A helpdesk user who is notified of a product defect by a customer ticket can create an alert that brings the issue to the attention of the relevant quality team."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:22
msgid "To create a new quality alert, start from the :menuselection:`Quality` module and select :menuselection:`Quality Control --> Quality Alerts --> Create`. The quality alert form can then be filled out as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:26
msgid ":guilabel:`Title`: choose a concise, yet descriptive title for the quality alert"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:27
msgid ":guilabel:`Product`: the product about which the quality alert is being created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:28
msgid ":guilabel:`Product Variant`: the specific variant of the product that has the quality issue, if applicable"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:30
msgid ":guilabel:`Lot`: the lot number assigned to the product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:31
msgid ":guilabel:`Work Center`: the work center where the quality issue originated"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:32
msgid ":guilabel:`Picking`: the picking operation during which the quality issue originated"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:33
msgid ":guilabel:`Team`: the quality team that will be notified by the quality alert"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:34
msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible`: the individual responsible for managing the quality alert"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:35
msgid ":guilabel:`Tags`: classify the quality alert based on user-created tags"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:36
msgid ":guilabel:`Root Cause`: the cause of the quality issue, if known"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:37
msgid ":guilabel:`Priority`: assign a priority between one and three stars to ensure more urgent issues are prioritized"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:40
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:40
msgid "The tabs at the bottom of the form can be used to provide additional information to quality teams:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`Description`: provide additional details about the quality issue"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:43
msgid ":guilabel:`Corrective Actions`: the method for fixing affected products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:44
msgid ":guilabel:`Preventive Actions`: procedures for preventing the issue from occurring in the future"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:46
msgid ":guilabel:`Miscellaneous`: the product vendor (if applicable), the company that produces the product, and the date assigned"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:-1
msgid "An example of a completed quality alert form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:54
msgid "Add quality alerts during the manufacturing process"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:56
msgid "Odoo enables manufacturing employees to create quality alerts within a work order without accessing the *Quality* module. From the work order tablet view, click the :guilabel:` ☰ ` hamburger menu icon in the top left corner and select :guilabel:`Quality Alert`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:-1
msgid "Access the work order menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:64
msgid "The quality alert form can then be filled out as detailed in the previous section. After saving the form, a new alert will appear on the :guilabel:`Quality Alerts` dashboard that can be found through the :menuselection:`Quality --> Quality Control` menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:69
msgid "Manage existing quality alerts"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:71
msgid "By default, quality alerts are organized in a kanban board view. The stages of the kanban board are fully configurable and alerts can be moved from one stage to the next by dragging and dropping or from within each alert. Additional options are available for viewing alerts, including graph, calendar, and pivot table views."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_alerts.rst:77
msgid "Filter alerts based on diverse criteria like date assigned or date closed. Alerts can also be grouped by quality team, root cause, or other parameters found under the :guilabel:`Filters` button menu."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:3
msgid "Add quality controls"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:5
msgid "Use **Odoo Quality** to control the quality of products before they are registered into stock, during picking operations, and when leaving the warehouse for a delivery order. By creating *quality control points*, manufacturers can set up quality checks that automatically trigger at specific points during production."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:11
msgid "Configure quality control points"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:13
msgid "To create a new quality control point, go to :menuselection:`Quality Control --> Control Points --> Create`. Then, fill in the following form fields, accordingly:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:16
msgid ":guilabel:`Title`: give the quality control point a simple, but informative title so production floor and quality check teams can understand it easily"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:18
msgid ":guilabel:`Products`: indicate which product(s) should pass through the specific quality control point"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:20
msgid ":guilabel:`Operations`: determine which operations team(s) should perform the quality control check (e.g., `Manufacturing`, `Receipts`, `Delivery Orders`, etc.)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:22
msgid ":guilabel:`Work Order Operation`: for manufacturing operations, use the drop-down menu to indicate which type of work order the quality control point applies to: :guilabel:`Manual Assembly`, :guilabel:`Packing`, :guilabel:`Assembly`, :guilabel:`Testing` or :guilabel:`Long time assembly`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:26
msgid ":guilabel:`Company`: add the company that will implement the quality control point. Usually this will be the company that owns the Odoo database. However, a multi-company or vendor profile can be selected, as well, for cases where there are multiple manufacturing or engineering locations"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:29
msgid ":guilabel:`Control Type`: using the drop-down menu, choose from :guilabel:`All Operations`, :guilabel:`Randomly` or :guilabel:`Periodically` to determine how often the control point should executed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:32
msgid ":guilabel:`Type`: using the drop-down menu, choose the control point type: :guilabel:`Instructions`, :guilabel:`Take a Picture`, :guilabel:`Pass - Fail`, or :guilabel:`Measure`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:35
msgid ":guilabel:`Team`: decide which quality team should receive the results of the quality control point check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:37
msgid ":guilabel:`Responsible`: add a point person to manage the status and evolution of the quality control point over time"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:42
msgid ":guilabel:`Instructions`: describe the quality check to be performed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:43
msgid ":guilabel:`Message If Failure`: detail what should be done if the check fails"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:44
msgid ":guilabel:`Notes`: use to include any additional information"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:-1
msgid "An example of a completed quality control point form for a Pass-Fail test."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:50
msgid "Once a control point has been configured, a quality check will be automatically created and assigned when the specified operation or work order has been reached. Quality checks can be managed by selecting :menuselection:`Quality Control --> Quality Checks`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:55
msgid "To see all of the quality checks created by a control point, go to :menuselection:`Quality Control --> Control Points`, select a control point, and click :guilabel:`Quality Checks` in the top right corner."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:60
msgid "Use case: configure a measure quality check"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:62
msgid "To ensure that a product meets specific measurement requirements, select :guilabel:`Measure` from the :guilabel:`Type` drop-down menu. Selecting the :guilabel:`Measure` quality check type reveals three new fields: :guilabel:`Device`, :guilabel:`Norm`, and :guilabel:`Tolerance`. These fields can be configured so that only products within a certain tolerance will pass the check:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:67
msgid ":guilabel:`Device`: select the measuring device that should be used to take the measurement (e.g., measuring tape)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:69
msgid ":guilabel:`Norm`: specify the desired measurement that the product should conform to and the unit of measurement that should be used"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:71
msgid ":guilabel:`Tolerance`: select the range that a measurement can be within while still passing the check (e.g., :guilabel:`from` 59.5 mm :guilabel:`to` 60.5 mm)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:-1
msgid "An example of a quality control point form configured for a measure quality check."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:78
msgid "When the quality control points form is complete, click :guilabel:`Save`. Now, this measurement-based test will trigger for products that were specified on the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/manufacturing/quality_control/quality_control_points.rst:81
msgid "When production of the specified product reaches the operation that requires a measure quality check, the manufacturing employee responsible will be prompted to record and validate the measured value in the tablet view. For products that measure within the values indicated in the :guilabel:`Tolerance` fields, the test will pass. However, for products that measure outside of those values, the test will fail. In that case, the worker who performed the check would create a quality alert from the tablet view. That quality alert can then be addressed by the quality management team."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:8
msgid "Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:10
msgid "**Odoo Purchase** helps you keep track of purchase agreements, quotations, and purchase orders. Learn how to keep track of purchase tender, automate replenishments and follow up on your orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase.rst:14
msgid "`Odoo Tutorials: Purchase <https://www.odoo.com/slides/purchase-23>`_"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced.rst:5
msgid "Advanced"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:3
msgid "Analyze the performance of your purchases"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:5
msgid "If your company regularly purchases products, you have several reasons to track and analyze your performance. The insights gathered can help you to better forecast and plan your future orders. For example, you can assess if your business is dependent on particular vendors, and the data can help you negotiate discounts on prices."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:11
msgid "Generate customized reports"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:13
msgid "Go to *Reporting* to access the purchase analysis. Simply by accessing the reporting dashboard, you can get a quick overview of your actual performance. By default, the reporting dashboard displays a line chart presenting the untaxed amount of your purchase orders per day, and below it, key metrics and a pivot table."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Reporting dashboard in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:22
msgid "While the data initially presented is useful, there are several tools and features you can use to get even more insights on your purchases."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:26
msgid "Use filters to select the data you need"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:28
msgid "Odoo offers several default filters you can use and combine by clicking on *Filters*. When you select one or several filters, Odoo looks for all the orders that match at least one of the filters you have chosen and populates the chart, key metrics, and pivot table with the data. The pre-configured filters are:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:33
msgid "All *Requests for Quotation*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:35
msgid "All *Purchase Orders*, except canceled ones"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:37
msgid "*Confirmation Date Last Year* includes all orders that were confirmed the previous year, canceled purchase orders included"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:40
msgid "*Order Date* includes all orders - request for quotations and purchases orders (canceled ones included) - depending on their date of creation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:43
msgid "*Confirmation Date* includes all confirmed orders, canceled ones included, depending on their date of confirmation"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:47
msgid "When you have to select a period, you can use multiple years, and, with at least one year selected, multiple quarters and the three most recent months."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:51
msgid "If you use the *Order Date* or *Confirmation Date* filters, the *Comparison* feature appears next to *Filters*. It enables you to compare the period you filtered with the previous one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Reporting filters in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:59
msgid "Add custom filters"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:61
msgid "Thanks to the 31 filtering options to choose from, the possibilities of your customizing your dataset are almost limitless. Go to :menuselection:`Filters --> Add Custom Filter`, specify the condition the filtering option should meet (e.g. *is equal to*, *contains*, etc.), and click on *Apply*. If you want to select orders matching several conditions simultaneously (*and* operator), repeat the process to add another custom filter. If you want to use the *or* operator, don't click on *Apply*, and click on *Add a condition* instead. Once you have added all the desired filtering options, click on *Apply*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Custom reporting filter in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:74
msgid "To avoid having to recreate custom filters every time, save them by clicking on :menuselection:`Favorites --> Save current search --> Save`. The customized search filter can then be accessed by clicking on *Favorites* or can even be set as the default filter when you open the reporting dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:80
msgid "Measure exactly what you need"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:82
msgid "Before selecting what you want to measure, you need to decide whether you prefer using the graph view or the pivot view. By default, the dashboard presents both views. However, the measures you select won't be applied to both views. You can access each view separately by clicking on the icons at the top right of the dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Switch reporting view in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:92
msgid "Visualize your data"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:94
msgid "You can transform the main graph in just a click by selecting one of the three charts: bar, line or pie. Fourteen different measures are available, but you can only use one at a time. However, you can group the measure using one or several of the 19 *Groups*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Reporting graph view in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:102
msgid "For bar and line charts, the selected measure is your y-axis, and the first group you select is used to create the x-axis. Adding more group adds additional lines (line chart) or transforms your bar chart into a stacked bar chart. For pie charts, the more groups you select, the more slices are displayed."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:108
msgid "Explore your data"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:110
msgid "The pivot table view enables you to explore your data in great detail. Unlike the graph view, the pivot table enables you to add several measures at the same time. By clicking on *Measures* or on the **+** sign in the *Total* column, you can add as many as you want, each assigned to a new column. By clicking on the **+** sign in the *Total* row, you can add *Groups*. If you click on a group's **+** sign, you can add a sub-group, and so on."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:-1
msgid "Pivot table view in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/advanced/analyze.rst:121
msgid "You can insert your pivot table's data directly in the Spreadsheet app or export it as an Excel file."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals.rst:5
msgid "Manage deals"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:3
msgid "Purchase agreements: blanket orders and calls for tenders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:5
msgid "There are two main types of purchase agreements preconfigured in Odoo: blanket orders and call for tenders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:8
msgid "Blanket orders are long-term agreements between a company and a vendor to deliver products on a recurring basis with predetermined pricing. Your company should consider using them when you frequently purchase the same products from the same vendor in varying quantities and/or at different times. Among their many benefits, you can save time as the ordering process is simplified, and money thanks to more advantageous bulk pricing."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:14
msgid "Calls for tenders use a special procedure to request offers from multiple vendors at the same time. While public sector organizations are often legally bound to release calls for tenders when they want to purchase goods or services, private organizations can also use them to get the best deal among several vendors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:20
msgid "Enable purchase agreements"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:22
msgid "From the Purchase app, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` and activate *Purchase Agreements*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Enable purchase agreements in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:30
msgid "Configure or create new types of purchase agreements"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:32
msgid "Before you start using purchase agreements, make sure they are configured the way you want by going to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Purchase Agreement Types`. From there, you can edit the way blanket orders and calls for tenders or *Create* a new type of purchase agreement. You can configure the:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:37
msgid "Agreement Type: the name you want to give to the agreement."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:39
msgid "Agreement Selection Type: you can either select multiple offers using *Select multiple RFQ (non-exclusive)*, which is the default setting for both blanket orders and calls for tenders, or a single offer using *Select only one RFQ (exclusive)*, which is sometimes needed for calls for tenders where you only want to select a single vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:44
msgid "Lines: generally, you would always want to select *Use lines of agreement*, which are the different product lines you can configure when you set up your purchase agreement. However, you can select *Do not create RfQ lines automatically* if you don't want your requests for quotations to be pre-filled in with that information."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:49
msgid "Quantities: if you use lines of agreements, you can also specify independently if the products' quantities should be used to pre-fill new requests for quotations. The default option for blanket orders is *Set quantities manually*, while for calls for tenders are set to *Use quantities of agreement*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Configure purchase agreements types in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:59
msgid "Set up a blanket order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:61
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Orders --> Purchase Agreements` and click on *Create*. Select *Blanket Order* as your *Agreement Type*. Next, select the vendor. The other fields aren't mandatory."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:64
msgid "Next, add the products you want to order and their price. Note that you can also add a *Quantity* for each product, for example, if you have agreed with your vendor to order a specific minimum quantity each time or in total. If you have configured your blanket order to *Set quantities manually*, this is only used for informational purposes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Set up a blanket order in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:73
msgid "You can also write any *Terms and Conditions* at the bottom of the agreement. Once you are satisfied with your blanket order, click on *Confirm*. Its status then changes from *Draft* to *Ongoing* and it's ready to be used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:78
msgid "Create requests for quotation from the blanket order"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:80
msgid "You can now create new quotations from the blanket order whenever you need it by clicking on *New Quotation*. Odoo automatically fills in requests for quotation with the information initially defined when you set up the blanket order. Depending on the way you configured the *Purchase Agreement Type*, product lines can also be pre-filled."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:85
msgid "From here, you can quickly view all the requests for quotations made under that blanket order by clicking on *RFQs/Orders*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Create new quotations for an ongoing blanket order in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:93
msgid "You can also create a *Request for Quotation* the usual way and then link it to an existing *Blanket Order*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:97
msgid "Blanket orders and replenishment"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:99
msgid "Blanket orders can be used for :doc:`automated replenishment <../../purchase/products/reordering>`, as once a blanket order is confirmed, a new vendor line is added to your product. Make sure the related vendor is in the first position if you have several vendors linked to your product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Blanket order added to product configuration in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:108
msgid "Set up a call for tenders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:110
msgid "Go to :menuselection:`Orders --> Purchase Agreements` and click on *Create*. Select *Call for Tenders* as your *Agreement Type*. The other fields aren't mandatory, but you can add the date you want to be delivered and set an agreement deadline. You usually don't want to select a vendor for calls for tenders as you are looking to get quotations from multiple vendors."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:115
msgid "Next, add the products you want to order and in what quantity. For calls for tenders, you typically don't add a price, as the vendors should give you their best quote."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:118
msgid "You can also write any *Terms and Conditions* at the bottom of the agreement. Once you are ready, click on *Confirm*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Set up a call for tenders in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:126
msgid "Requests quotations from the call for tenders"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:128
msgid "You can now request new quotations from the call for tenders. Click on *New Quotation* and select one of your vendors you want to invite to the call for tenders. Product lines should also be pre-filled in, depending on how you configured the *Purchase Agreement Type*. Click on *Send by email* to send it to the vendor. Go back to the call for tenders and repeat this process for each vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Request a quotation from a call for tenders in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:138
msgid "Once you have sent a request for quotation to every vendor and receiving their quotes, click on *Validate* to proceed to the bid selection. Next, click on the RFQs/Orders smart button to view all your vendors' quotations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Validate a call for tenders and view all quotations in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:146
msgid "Click on each request for quotation to add the price communicated by your vendors manually. When that's done, select the most advantageous offer and click on *Confirm Order*. This automatically closes the call for tenders. You can now proceed with the purchase order as you would for a regular one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/agreements.rst:-1
msgid "Confirm an order in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:3
msgid "Bill control policies"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:5
msgid "In Odoo, the *bill control* policy determines the quantities billed by vendors on every purchase order, for ordered or received quantities. The policy selected in the settings will act as the default value and will be applied to any new product created."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:12
msgid "To view the default bill control policy and make changes, go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Here, there are the two :guilabel:`Bill Control` policy options: :guilabel:`Ordered quantities` and :guilabel:`Received quantities`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:17
msgid "The policy selected will be the default for any new product created. The definition of each policy is as follows:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:20
msgid ":guilabel:`Ordered quantities`: creates a vendor bill as soon as a purchase order is confirmed. The products and quantities in the purchase order are used to generate a draft bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:22
msgid ":guilabel:`Received quantities`: a bill is created only *after* part of the total order has been received. The products and quantities *received* are used to generate a draft bill. An error message will appear if creation of a vendor bill is attempted without receiving anything."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1
msgid "Bill control policy draft bill error message."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:31
msgid "If one or two products need a different control policy, the default bill control setting can be overridden by going to the :guilabel:`Purchase` tab in a product's template and modifying its :guilabel:`Control Policy` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:36
msgid "Example flow: Ordered quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:38
msgid "To complete an example workflow using the *ordered quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Ordered quantities`. Then, :guilabel:`Save` changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:42
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Purchase` app, create a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`. Fill out the information on the quotation form, add products to the invoice lines, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. Then, click :guilabel:`Create Bill`. Since the policy is set to *ordered quantities*, the draft bill can be confirmed as soon as it is created, without any products actually being received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:48
msgid "Example flow: Received quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:50
msgid "To complete an example workflow using the *received quantities* bill control policy, first go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section, and select :guilabel:`Received quantities`. Then, :guilabel:`Save` changes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:54
msgid "In the :guilabel:`Purchase` app, create a new :abbr:`RFQ (Request for Quotation)`. Fill out the information on the quotation form, add products to the invoice lines, and click :guilabel:`Confirm Order`. Then, click on the :guilabel:`Receipt smart button`. Set the quantities in the :guilabel:`Done` column to match the quantities in the :guilabel:`Demand` column, and :guilabel:`Validate` the changes. Then, in the purchase order, click :guilabel:`Create Bill` and :guilabel:`Confirm`. Since the policy is set to *received quantities*, the draft bill can be confirmed *only* when at least some of the quantities are received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:63
msgid "3-way matching"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:65
msgid "Activating :guilabel:`3-way matching` ensures that vendor bills are only paid once some or all of the products included in the purchase order have actually been received. To activate it, go to :menuselection:`Purchase --> Configuration --> Settings`, and scroll down to the :guilabel:`Invoicing` section. Then, click :guilabel:`3-way matching: purchases, receptions, and bills`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:72
msgid "3-way matching is *only* intended to work when the bill control policy is set to *received quantities*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:76
msgid "Pay vendor bills with 3-way matching"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:78
msgid "When :guilabel:`3-way matching` is activated, vendor bills will display the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field under the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab. When a new vendor bill is created, the field will be set to :guilabel:`Yes`, since a bill can't be created until at least some of the products included in a purchase order have been received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1
msgid "Draft bill should be paid field status."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:88
msgid "If the total quantity of products from a purchase order has not been received, Odoo only includes the products that *have* been received in the draft vendor bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:91
msgid "Draft bills can be edited to increase the billed quantity, change the price of the products in the bill, and add additional products to the bill. If this is done, the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field status will be set to :guilabel:`Exception`. This means that Odoo notices the discrepancy, but doesn't block the changes or display an error message, since there might be a valid reason for making changes to the draft bill."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:97
msgid "Once payment has been registered for a vendor bill and displays the green :guilabel:`Paid` banner, the :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` field status will be set to :guilabel:`No`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:101
msgid "The :guilabel:`Should Be Paid` status on bills is set automatically by Odoo. However, the status can be changed manually by clicking the field's drop-down menu inside the :guilabel:`Other Info` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:106
msgid "View a purchase order's billing status"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:108
msgid "When a purchase order is confirmed, its :guilabel:`Billing Status` can be viewed under the :guilabel:`Other Information` tab on the purchase order form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:-1
msgid "Purchase order billing status."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:115
msgid "Below is a list of the different statuses that a :guilabel:`Billing Status` could appear as and when they are displayed, depending on the bill control policy used."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:119
msgid ":guilabel:`Billing Status`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:119
msgid "**Conditions**"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:121
msgid "*On received quantities*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:121
msgid "*On ordered quantities*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:123
msgid ":guilabel:`Nothing to Bill`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:123
msgid "PO confirmed; no products received"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:123
msgid "*Not applicable*"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:125
msgid ":guilabel:`Waiting Bills`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:125
msgid "All/some products received; bill not created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:125
msgid "PO confirmed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:127
msgid ":guilabel:`Fully Billed`"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:127
msgid "All/some products received; draft bill created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/control_bills.rst:127
msgid "Draft bill created"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:3
msgid "Manage vendor bills"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:5
msgid "The **Purchase** application allows you to manage your purchase orders, incoming products, and vendor bills all seamlessly in one place."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:8
msgid "If you want to set up a vendor bill control process, the first thing you need to do is to have purchase data in Odoo. Knowing what has been purchased and received is the first step towards understanding your purchase management processes."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:13
msgid "Here is the standard work flow in Odoo:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:15
msgid "You begin with a **Request for Quotation (RFQ)** to send out to your vendor(s)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:18
msgid "Once the vendor has accepted the RFQ, confirm the RFQ into a **Purchase Order (PO)**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:21
msgid "Confirming the PO generates an **Incoming Shipment** if you purchased any stockable products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:24
msgid "Upon receiving a **Vendor Bill** from your Vendor, validate the bill with products received in the previous step to ensure accuracy."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:27
msgid "This process may be done by three different people within the company, or only one."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:34
msgid "Installing the Purchase and Inventory applications"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:36
msgid "From the **Apps** application, search for the **Purchase** module and install it. Due to certain dependencies, installing Purchase will automatically install the **Inventory** and **Accounting** applications."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:41
msgid "Creating products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:43
msgid "Creating products in Odoo is essential for quick and efficient purchasing within Odoo. Simply navigate to the Products submenu under Purchase and click create."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:50
msgid "When creating the product, pay attention to the **Product Type** field, since it is important:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:53
msgid "Products that are set as **Stockable or Consumable** will allow you to keep track of their inventory levels. These options imply stock management and will allow for receiving these kinds of products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:58
msgid "Conversely, products that are set as a **Service or Digital Product** will not imply stock management, simply due to the fact that there is no inventory to manage. You will not be able to receive products under either of these designations."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:64
msgid "It is recommended that you create a **Miscellaneous** product for all purchases that occur infrequently and do not require inventory valuation or management. If you create such a product, it is recommended to set the product type to **Service**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:69
msgid "Managing your Vendor Bills"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:72
msgid "Purchasing products or services"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:74
msgid "From the purchase application, you can create a purchase order with as many products as you need. If the vendor sends you a confirmation or quotation for an order, you may record the order reference number in the **Vendor Reference** field. This will enable you to easily match the PO with the the vendor bill later (as the vendor bill will probably include the Vendor Reference)"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:84
msgid "Validate the purchase order and receive the products from the Inventory application."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:88
msgid "Receiving Products"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:90
msgid "If you purchased any stockable products that you manage the inventory of, you will need to receive the products from the Inventory application after you confirm a purchase order. From the **Inventory dashboard**, you should see a button linking you directly to the transfer of products. This button is outlined in red below:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:99
msgid "Navigating this route will take you to a list of all orders waiting to be received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:105
msgid "If you have a lot of awaiting orders, apply a filter using the search bar in the upper right. With this search bar, you may filter based on the vendor (partner), the product, or the source document (also known as the reference of your purchase order). You can also group the orders by different criteria under **Group By**. Selecting an item from this list will open the following screen where you then will receive the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:116
msgid "Purchasing service products does not trigger a delivery order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:119
msgid "Managing Vendor Bills"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:121
msgid "When you receive a vendor bill for a previous purchase, be sure to record it in the Purchases application under the **Control Menu**. You need to create a new vendor bill even if you already registered a purchase order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:129
msgid "The first thing you will need to do upon creating a vendor bill is to select the appropriate vendor, since doing so will also pull up any associated accounting or pricelist information. From there, you can choose to specify one or multiple Purchase Orders to populate the Vendor Bill with. When you select a Purchase Order from the list, Odoo will pull any uninvoiced products associated to that Purchase Order and automatically populate that information below. If you are having a hard time finding the appropriate vendor bill, you may search through the list by inputting the vendor reference number or your internal purchase order number."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:143
msgid "While the invoice is in a draft state, you can make any modifications you need (i.e. remove or add product lines, modify quantities, and change prices)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:148
msgid "Your vendor may send you several bills for the same Purchase Order if:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:150
msgid "Your vendor is in back-order and is sending you invoices as they ship the products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:151
msgid "Your vendor is sending you a partial bill or asking for a deposit."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:153
msgid "Every time you record a new vendor bill, Odoo will automatically populate the product quantities based on what has been received from the vendor. If this value is showing a zero, this means that you have not yet received this product and simply serves as a reminder that the product is not in hand and you may need to inquire further into this. At any point in time, before you validate the Vendor Bill, you may override this zero quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:162
msgid "Vendor Bill Matching"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:165
msgid "What to do if your vendor bill does not match what you received"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:167
msgid "If the bill you receive from the vendor has quantities that do not match the quantities automatically populated by Odoo, this could be due to several reasons:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:171
msgid "The vendor is incorrectly charging you for products and/or services that you have not ordered."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:174
msgid "The vendor is billing you for products that you might not have received yet, as the invoicing control may be based on ordered or received quantities."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:178
msgid "The vendor did not bill you for previously purchased products."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:180
msgid "In these instances it is recommended that you verify that the bill, and any associated purchase order to the vendor, are accurate and that you understand what you have ordered and what you have already received."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:184
msgid "If you are unable to find a purchase order related to a vendor bill, this could be due to one of a few reasons:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:187
msgid "The vendor has already invoiced you for this purchase order; therefore it is not going to appear anywhere in the selection."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:190
msgid "Someone in the company forgot to record a purchase order for this vendor."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:193
msgid "The vendor is charging you for something you did not order."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:198
msgid "How product quantities are managed"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:200
msgid "By default, services are managed based on ordered quantities, while stockables and consumables are managed based on received quantities."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:203
msgid "If you need to manage products based on ordered quantities over received quantities, you will need to belong to the group **Purchase Manager**. Ask your system administrator to enable these access on :menuselection:`Settings --> Users --> Users --> Access Rights`. Once you belong to the correct group, select the product(s) you wish to modify, and you should see a new field appear, labeled **Control Purchase Bills**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:213
msgid "You can then change the default management method for the selected product to be based on either:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:216
msgid "Ordered quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:218
msgid "or Received quantities"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:221
msgid "Batch Billing"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/manage_deals/manage.rst:223
msgid "When creating a vendor bill and selecting the appropriate purchase order, you may continue to select additional purchase orders. Odoo will add the additional line items from the purchase orders you select. If you have not deleted the previous line items from the first purchase order, the bill will be linked to all the appropriate purchase orders."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:3
msgid "Configure reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:5
msgid "For certain products, it is necessary to ensure that there is always a minimum amount available on hand at any given time. By adding a reordering rule to a product, it is possible to automate the reordering process so that a purchase order is automatically created whenever the amount on hand falls below a set threshold."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:11
msgid "The *Inventory* module must be installed to use reordering rules."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:14
msgid "Configure products for reordering"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:16
msgid "Products must be configured in a specific way before a reordering rule can be added to them."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:18
msgid "Starting from the :menuselection:`Inventory`, :menuselection:`Manufacturing`, :menuselection:`Purchase`, or :menuselection:`Sales` module, navigate to :menuselection:`Products --> Products` and then click :guilabel:`Create` to make a new product. Alternatively, find a product that already exists in the database and click into it's product form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:23
msgid "Next, on the product form, enable reordering by checking the :guilabel:`Can be Purchased` option underneathe the :guilabel:`Product Name` field. Finally, set the :guilabel:`Product Type` to `Storable Product` under the :guilabel:`General Information` tab."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Configure a product for reordering in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:32
msgid "Add a reordering rule to a product"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:34
msgid "After properly configuring a product, a reordering rule can be added to it by selecting the now visible :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` tab at the top of that product's form, and then clicking :guilabel:`Create` on the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` dashboard."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Access reordering rules for a product from the product page in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:42
msgid "Once created, the reordering rule can be configured to generate purchase orders automatically by defining the following fields:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:45
msgid ":guilabel:`Location` specifies where the ordered quantities should be stored once they are received and entered into stock."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:47
msgid ":guilabel:`Min Quantity` sets the lower threshold for the reordering rule while :guilabel:`Max Quantity` sets the upper threshold. If the stock on hand falls below the minimum quantity, a new purchase order will be created to replenish it up to the maximum quantity."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:52
msgid "If :guilabel:`Min Quantity` is set to `5` and :guilabel:`Max Quantity` is set to `25` and the stock on hand falls to four, a purchase order will be created for 21 units of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:55
msgid ":guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` can be configured so that products are only ordered in batches of a certain quantity. Depending on the number entered, this can result in the creation of a purchase order that would put the resulting stock on hand above what is specified in the :guilabel:`Max Quantity` field."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:61
msgid "If :guilabel:`Max Quantity` is set to `100` but :guilabel:`Multiple Quantity` is set to order the product in batches of `200`, a purchase order will be created for 200 units of the product."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:65
msgid ":guilabel:`UoM` specifies the unit of measurement by which the quantity will be ordered. For discrete products, this should be set to `Units`. However, it can also be set to units of measurement like `Volume` or `Weight` for non-discrete products like water or bricks."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:-1
msgid "Configure the reordering rule in Odoo."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:74
msgid "Manually trigger reordering rules using the scheduler"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:76
msgid "Reordering rules will be automatically triggered by the scheduler, which runs once a day by default. To trigger reordering rules manually, navigate to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Run Scheduler`. On the pop-up window, confirm the manual action by clicking :guilabel:`Run Scheduler`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:82
msgid "Manually triggering reordering rules will also trigger any other scheduled actions."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:85
msgid "Manage reordering rules"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:87
msgid "To manage the reordering rules for a single product, navigate to that product page's form and select the :guilabel:`Reordering Rules` tab at the top of the form."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/reordering.rst:90
msgid "To manage all reordering rules for every product, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Reordering Rules`. From this dashboard, typical bulk actions in Odoo can be performed such as exporting data or archiving rules that are no longer needed. As well, the :guilabel:`Filters`, :guilabel:`Group By` or triple-dotted menu on the form are available to search for and/or organize the reordering rules as desired."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:3
msgid "Purchase in different units of measure than sales"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:5
msgid "When you purchase a product, it may happen that your vendor uses a different unit of measure than you do when you sell it. This can cause confusion between sales and purchase representatives. It is also time-consuming to convert measures manually every time. With Odoo, you can configure your product once and let Odoo handle the conversion."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:10
msgid "Consider the following examples:"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:12
msgid "You purchase orange juice from an American vendor, and they use **gallons**. However, your customers are European and use **liters**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:15
msgid "You buy curtains from a vendor in the form of **rolls** and you sell pieces of the rolls to your customers using **square meters**."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:19
msgid "Enable units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:21
msgid "Open your Sales app and go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. Under Product Catalog, enable *Units of Measure*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Enable the units of measure option in Odoo Sales"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:29
msgid "Specify sales and purchase units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:32
msgid "Standard units of measure"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:34
msgid "A variety of units of measure are available by default in your database. Each belongs to one of the five pre-configured units of measure categories: *Length / Distance*, *Unit*, *Volume*, *Weight* and *Working Time*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:39
msgid "You can create your new units of measure and units of measure categories (see next section)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:41
msgid "To specify different units of measures for sales and purchases, open the Purchase app and go to :menuselection:`Products --> Products`. Create a product or select an existing one. Under the product's *General Information* tab, first select the *Unit of Measure* to be used for sales (as well as for other apps such as inventory). Then, select the *Purchase Unit of Measure* to be used for purchases."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:47
msgid "Back to the first example, if you purchase orange juice from your vendor in **gallons** and sell it to your customers in **liters**, first select *L* (liters) as the *Unit of Measure*, and *gal (US)* (gallons) as the *Purchase Unit of Measure*, then click on *Save*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Configure a product's units of measure in Odoo"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:56
msgid "Create new units of measure and units of measure categories"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:58
msgid "Sometimes you need to create your own units and categories, either because the measure is not pre-configured in Odoo or because the units do not relate with each other (e.g. kilos and centimeters)."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:62
msgid "If you take the second example where you buy curtains from a vendor in the form of **rolls** and you sell pieces of the rolls using **square meters**, you need to create a new *Units of Measure Category* in order to relate both units of measure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:66
msgid "To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Units of Measure Categories`. Click on *Create* and name the category."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Create a new units of measure category in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:73
msgid "The next step is to create the two units of measures. To do so, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Units of Measure`."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:76
msgid "First, create the unit of measure used as the reference point for converting to other units of measure inside the category by clicking on *Create*. Name the unit and select the units of measure category you just created. For the *Type*, select *Reference Unit of Measure for this category type*. Enter the *Rounding Precision* you would like to use. The quantity computed by Odoo is always a multiple of this value."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:82
msgid "In the example, as you cannot purchase less than 1 roll and won't use fractions of a roll as a unit of measure, you can enter 1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Create a new reference unit of measure in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:89
msgid "If you use a *Rounding Precision* inferior to 0.01, a warning message might appear stating that it is higher than the *Decimal Accuracy* and that it might cause inconsistencies. If you wish to use a *Rounding Precision* lower than 0.01, first activate the :ref:`developer mode <developer-mode>`, then go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> Database Structure --> Decimal Accuracy`, select *Product Unit of Measure* and edit *Digits* accordingly. For example, if you want to use a rounding precision of 0.00001, set *Digits* to 5."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:96
msgid "Next, create a second unit of measure, name it, and select the same units of measure category as your reference unit. As *Type*, select *Smaller* or *Bigger than the reference Unit of Measure*, depending on your situation."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:100
msgid "As the curtain roll equals to 100 square meters, you should select *Smaller*."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:102
msgid "Next, you need to enter the *Ratio* between your reference unit and the second one. If the second unit is smaller, the *Ratio* should be greater than 1. If the second unit is larger, the ratio should be smaller than 1."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:106
msgid "For your curtain roll, the ratio should be set to 100."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Create a second unit of measure in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:112
msgid "You can now configure your product just as you would using Odoo's standard units of measure."
msgstr ""
#: ../../content/applications/inventory_and_mrp/purchase/products/uom.rst:-1
msgid "Set a product's units of measure using your own units in Odoo Purchase"
msgstr ""
Reference in New Issue View Git Blame Copy Permalink